forked from arti/vt1200
9437 lines
386 KiB
Plaintext
9437 lines
386 KiB
Plaintext
This document was prepared and published by Educational Services Development and
|
||
Publishing, Digital Equipment Corporation.
|
||
Installing and Using
|
||
The VT1000 Video Terminal
|
||
Order Number EK–V1000–UG–002
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Digital Equipment Corporation
|
||
First Edition, February 1990 Second Edition, June 1990
|
||
|
||
The information in this document is subject to change without notice and should not
|
||
be construed as a commitment by Digital Equipment Corporation. Digital Equipment
|
||
Corporation assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this document.
|
||
|
||
The software described in this document is furnished under a license and may be used or
|
||
copied only in accordance with the terms of such license.
|
||
|
||
No responsibility is assumed for the use or reliability of software on equipment that is not
|
||
supplied by Digital Equipment Corporation or its affiliated companies.
|
||
|
||
Restricted Rights: Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U. S. Government is subject to
|
||
restrictions as set forth in subparagraph ( c ) ( 1 ) ( ii ) of the Rights in Technical Data
|
||
and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252.227–7013.
|
||
|
||
Copyright © by Digital Equipment Corporation 1990
|
||
|
||
All Rights Reserved.
|
||
Printed in Taiwan.
|
||
|
||
FCC NOTICE: The equipment described in this manual generates, uses, and may emit
|
||
radio frequency energy. The equipment has been type tested and found to comply with
|
||
the limits for a Class A computing device pursuant to Subpart J of Part 15 of FCC
|
||
Rules, which are designed to provide reasonable protection against such radio frequency
|
||
interference when operated in a commercial environment. Operation of this equipment in
|
||
a residential area may cause interference, in which case the user at his own expense may
|
||
be required to take measures to correct the interference.
|
||
|
||
AT&T and UNIX are trademarks of the American Telephone and Telegraph Company.
|
||
|
||
X Window System is a trademark of the Massachusetts Institute of Technology.
|
||
|
||
The following are trademarks of Digital Equipment Corporation:
|
||
DEC DECwindows PDP ThinWire
|
||
DECall DECwriter P/OS ULTRIX
|
||
DECconnect DIBOL Professional ULTRIX-32
|
||
DECmailer LA Q-bus UNIBUS
|
||
DECmate LA50 Q22-bus VAX
|
||
DECnet LA75 Companion Rainbow VAXstation
|
||
DECserver LN01, LN03 ReGIS VMS
|
||
DECservice LN03 PLUS RSTS VR150
|
||
DECstation LQP02 RSX VT, VT52, VT100
|
||
DECsupport MASSBUS RT VT220, VT320, VT420
|
||
DECterm MicroPDP Scholar VT1000
|
||
DECUS MicroVAX SERVIcenter
|
||
Contents
|
||
|
||
About This Guide xi
|
||
|
||
|
||
1 A Look at the Terminal
|
||
VT1000 Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
|
||
System Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
|
||
Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
|
||
Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
|
||
Mouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
|
||
X Window Sessions and Video Terminal Sessions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
|
||
X Window System and DECwindows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
|
||
System Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
|
||
VMS Systems: LAT Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
|
||
UNIX and ULTRIX Systems: TCP/IP TELNET Protocol . . . . . . . 4
|
||
How the VT1000 Works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
|
||
VT1000 Terminal Highlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
|
||
Customizing Your Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
|
||
Compatibility with VT Series Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
|
||
Character Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
|
||
Programming the VT1000 Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
iii
|
||
iv Contents
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Installing Your VT1000 Video Terminal
|
||
|
||
2 Installing Your Terminal
|
||
Site Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
|
||
Selecting a Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
|
||
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
|
||
Installing Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
|
||
Installing the RAM Memory Controller Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
|
||
Installing the ROM Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
|
||
|
||
|
||
3 Getting Started
|
||
VT1000 Terminal Manager Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
|
||
Choosing the Display Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
|
||
Choosing the Correct Keyboard Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
|
||
Starting a Session on Your Host System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
|
||
Starting a Video Terminal or X Window Session
|
||
on a VMS System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
|
||
Starting a Video Terminal or X Window Session
|
||
on an ULTRIX or UNIX System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
|
||
Starting a Video Terminal Session on the Serial Host Port . . . . . 47
|
||
Ending a Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
|
||
|
||
|
||
Using Your VT1000 Video Terminal
|
||
|
||
4 Using Windows
|
||
DECwindows Differences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
|
||
Before You Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
|
||
Using the Mouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
|
||
What Are Windows? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
|
||
Using Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
|
||
Selecting Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
|
||
Moving Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
|
||
Changing the Size of Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
|
||
Shrinking Windows to Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
|
||
Expanding Icons to Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
|
||
Contents v
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Stacking Overlapping Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
|
||
Choosing Items from Pull-Down Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
|
||
Supplying Information in Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
|
||
Moving and Changing Settings in a Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
|
||
Using Scroll Bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
|
||
|
||
|
||
5 Using Video Terminal (VTE) Windows
|
||
VTE Window Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
|
||
Clearing, Resetting, or Leaving the Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
|
||
Copying and Pasting Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
|
||
Host Synchronization Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
|
||
Selecting Text to Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
|
||
Pasting Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
|
||
Using QuickCopy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
|
||
Customizing the VTE Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
|
||
Displaying the Customize Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
|
||
Saving and Recalling Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
|
||
Changing Your VTE Window Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
|
||
Changing Your VTE Display Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
|
||
Changing Your VTE General Operating Features . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
|
||
Changing Your VTE Keyboard Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
|
||
Choosing National Replacement Character Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
|
||
Printing from a Video Terminal Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
|
||
|
||
|
||
6 Using the VT1000 Terminal Manager
|
||
VT1000 Terminal Manager Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
|
||
Creating Sessions on a Host System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
|
||
Creating a Video Terminal Window on a VMS System . . . . . . . . . 95
|
||
Creating an X Window Session on a VMS System . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
|
||
Creating a Video Terminal Window or X Window Session on an
|
||
ULTRIX or UNIX System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
|
||
Creating a Video Terminal Window on the Host or Printer Port
|
||
(VMS, ULTRIX, or UNIX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
|
||
Creating a TCP/IP X Window Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
|
||
Pausing or Ending Sessions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
|
||
Pausing a Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
|
||
vi Contents
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Ending a Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
|
||
Customizing Your VT1000 Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
|
||
Printing the Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
|
||
|
||
|
||
7 Customizing the VT1000 Terminal Manager
|
||
Displaying the Customize Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
|
||
Saving and Recalling Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
|
||
Changing Your Keyboard Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
|
||
Choosing the Display Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
|
||
Changing Your Pointer and Mouse Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
|
||
Changing Your Print Screen Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
|
||
Changing Your Security Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
|
||
Locking Your Customize Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
|
||
Activating Customize Password Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
|
||
Changing Your Window Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
|
||
Controlling the Display of Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
|
||
Changing Your Host Port or Printer Port Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
|
||
Changing Your LAT Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
|
||
Changing Your TCP/IP Settings (ULTRIX and UNIX Systems) . . . . 142
|
||
Changing Your TCP/IP Name Server Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
|
||
Changing Your TCP/IP Routing Table Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
|
||
Changing Your Font Path Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
|
||
|
||
|
||
8 The Keyboard
|
||
LK401 Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
|
||
Keyboard Dialect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
|
||
Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
|
||
Main Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
|
||
Editing Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
|
||
Numeric Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
|
||
Top-Row Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
|
||
Data Processing Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
|
||
Compose Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
|
||
Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
|
||
Audible Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
|
||
Contents vii
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Keyclick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
|
||
Bell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
|
||
|
||
|
||
9 Typing Additional Characters
|
||
What Characters Can I Type? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
|
||
Key Sequences with Nonspacing Diacritical Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
|
||
How to Type a Character Using the Compose Character Key . . . . . 162
|
||
How to Type a Character Using the Group Shift Key . . . . . . . . . . . 162
|
||
Invalid Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
|
||
Canceling or Restarting a Key Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
|
||
Hexadecimal Key Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
|
||
|
||
|
||
10 VT1000 VTE Programming Summary
|
||
Locator Device Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
|
||
Enable Filter Rectangle (DECEFR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
|
||
Enable Locator Reports (DECELR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
|
||
Locator Report (DECLRP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
|
||
Request Locator Position (DECRQLP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
|
||
Select Locator Events (DECSLE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
|
||
Programming Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
|
||
|
||
|
||
11 Solving Problems and Getting Service
|
||
Operating Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
|
||
Power-Up Self-Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
|
||
Screen Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
|
||
Digital Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
|
||
How To Get Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
|
||
|
||
|
||
A Specifications
|
||
Site Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
|
||
Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
|
||
Electrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
|
||
Display (Monochrome Monitors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
|
||
LK401 Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
|
||
viii Contents
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
B Options and Documentation
|
||
Optional Memory Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
|
||
Modems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
|
||
Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
|
||
Related Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
|
||
Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
|
||
|
||
|
||
C Communication
|
||
Network Protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
|
||
Serial Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
|
||
Serial Communication Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
|
||
Serial XON/XOFF Flow Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
|
||
Modems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
|
||
Modem Connections and Disconnections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
|
||
Break Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
|
||
Communication Connector Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
|
||
Pin Signals for the Pointing Device Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
|
||
Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
|
||
|
||
|
||
D System Management Tasks
|
||
Preparing the LAT Environment (VMS Systems) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
|
||
Preparing the TCP/IP Environment (ULTRIX and UNIX Systems) . 205
|
||
Running a Remote X Window Session on a VMS System . . . . . . . . . 214
|
||
|
||
|
||
Glossary
|
||
|
||
Index
|
||
Contents ix
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Tables
|
||
9–1 Keyboards with Diacritical Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
|
||
9–2 Key Sequences for Additional Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
|
||
10–1 Primary DA Alias Responses from the VT1000 . . . . . . . . . . . 182
|
||
10–2 Control Function Requests (non-VT320) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
|
||
11–1 Operating Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
|
||
C–1 6-Pin DEC-423 Communication and Printer Interface Signals 202
|
||
C–2 Pin Assignments for the Pointing Device Connector . . . . . . . 203
|
||
About This Guide
|
||
|
||
|
||
This guide is designed to help you install, operate, and maintain your
|
||
VT1000 video terminal. The guide provides information on how to open X
|
||
window or video terminal sessions on a VMS, ULTRIX, or UNIX system.
|
||
|
||
Who Should Use This Guide
|
||
This guide is for the installer and general user of the VT1000 video
|
||
terminal. The guide also provides programmers with a summary of
|
||
control functions they can use when writing applications for video
|
||
terminal (VTE) windows.
|
||
|
||
Organization
|
||
This guide contains the following chapters and appendices:
|
||
• Chapter 1, ‘‘A Look at the Terminal,’’ provides an overview of the
|
||
VT1000 terminal and its features.
|
||
• Chapter 2, ‘‘Installing Your Terminal,’’ describes how to install your
|
||
terminal and connect it to a host computer system. The chapter also
|
||
describes how to install optional RAM and ROM boards.
|
||
• Chapter 3, ‘‘Getting Started,’’ describes how to start a session on your
|
||
host system. You can use the terminal with VMS, ULTRIX, or UNIX
|
||
systems.
|
||
• Chapter 4, ‘‘Using Windows,’’ describes how to to manipulate windows,
|
||
choose menu items, and edit text. The chapter also shows how to use
|
||
the mouse.
|
||
• Chapter 5, ‘‘Using Video Terminal (VTE) Windows,’’ describes how to
|
||
use video terminal (VTE) windows. VTE windows let you emulate
|
||
Digital’s VT series of text terminals.
|
||
|
||
|
||
xi
|
||
xii About This Guide
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
• Chapter 6, ‘‘Using the VT1000 Terminal Manager,’’ describes how to
|
||
use the VT1000 Terminal Manager window. You use this window to
|
||
begin and end sessions with a host system.
|
||
• Chapter 7, ‘‘Customizing the VT1000 Terminal Manager,’’ describes
|
||
how to customize the terminal’s operating settings for your computing
|
||
environment and personal preference.
|
||
• Chapter 8, ‘‘The Keyboard,’’ describes the function of the keyboard’s
|
||
keys, bells, and indicator lights.
|
||
• Chapter 9, ‘‘Typing Additional Characters,’’ describes how to enter
|
||
characters that do not appear as standard characters on your
|
||
keyboard (for example, accented letters).
|
||
• Chapter 10, ‘‘VT1000 VTE Programming Summary,’’ provides
|
||
programmers with a quick-reference summary of VT1000
|
||
programming control functions for video terminal (VTE) window
|
||
applications.
|
||
• Chapter 11, ‘‘Solving Problems and Getting Service,’’ describes how to
|
||
solve typical operating problems and directs you where to get more
|
||
help.
|
||
• Appendix A, ‘‘Specifications,’’ lists VT1000 specifications.
|
||
• Appendix B, ‘‘Options and Documentation,’’ lists options, related
|
||
documentation, and ordering information.
|
||
• Appendix C, ‘‘Communication,’’ provides technical information on
|
||
communication with a host computer system. The appendix describes
|
||
network protocols for LAT and TCP/IP connections, as well as serial
|
||
communication.
|
||
• Appendix D, ‘‘System Management Tasks,’’ describes tasks for system
|
||
managers to perform before installing and running the terminal. The
|
||
appendix also describes how to run a remote X window session on a
|
||
VMS system.
|
||
• The glossary defines new terms introduced in the text.
|
||
About This Guide xiii
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Conventions
|
||
The following conventions are used in this manual:
|
||
|
||
|
||
Mouse Refers to any pointing device, such as a mouse, a puck, or a
|
||
stylus.
|
||
MB1, MB2, and MB1 indicates the left mouse button. MB2 indicates the
|
||
MB3 middle mouse button. MB3 indicates the right mouse
|
||
button. (The buttons can be redefined by the user.)
|
||
Keyboard keys Keys or switches that are labeled appear in a box .
|
||
Example: Press the Return key.
|
||
Ctrl key For Ctrl key sequences, hold down Ctrl and press the other
|
||
key.
|
||
Warnings Provide information to prevent personal injury.
|
||
Cautions Provide information to prevent damage to equipment or
|
||
software.
|
||
Notes Provide general information about the current topic.
|
||
Glossary entries Appear in italics when first used in text.
|
||
|
||
Note to the Reader
|
||
The screens and windows shown in this guide represent the latest
|
||
information available at the time of publication. Some screens and
|
||
windows may not exactly match those that appear on your terminal.
|
||
1
|
||
1
|
||
A Look at the Terminal
|
||
|
||
|
||
This chapter introduces you to the VT1000 video display terminal. The
|
||
chapter provides an overview of the terminal and its basic operating
|
||
features. The chapter also tells you where to look in this manual for more
|
||
information about each feature.
|
||
The VT1000 lets you run X window applications on your computer system,
|
||
including Digital’s DECwindows software. The VT1000 also provides
|
||
video terminal (VTE) windows that are compatible with VT series text
|
||
terminals.
|
||
You can use the VT1000 with one or more computer systems. The VT1000
|
||
can work with computers that use the VMS, UNIX, or ULTRIX operating
|
||
systems. You have several options for connecting your terminal to a
|
||
computer.
|
||
You can use a mouse or keyboard to send information to the host system.
|
||
You can print data displayed on the screen by connecting a printer to the
|
||
VT1000 system box or by using printers connected to your host system.
|
||
|
||
VT1000 Components
|
||
The VT1000 terminal has four main components: a system box, monitor,
|
||
keyboard, and mouse.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 1 1
|
||
2 A Look at the Terminal
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
GSF_0821_89.DG
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
System Box
|
||
The VT1000 system box contains the terminal’s logic and memory boards.
|
||
It also provides the connectors for power, system communication, and
|
||
other devices. A cover panel attaches to the rear of the system box to
|
||
conceal the connectors and cables. The system box is 368 mm deep 394
|
||
mm wide 57 mm high (14.5 inches 15.5 inches 2.25 inches).
|
||
|
||
Monitor
|
||
The VT1000 comes with one of the following monochrome monitors:
|
||
VR150 (380 mm/15 inch) with tilt-swivel stand
|
||
VR262 (480 mm/19 inch) with stationary stand
|
||
VR315 (380 mm/15 inch) with tilt-swivel stand
|
||
VR319 (480 mm/19 inch) with tilt-swivel stand
|
||
VRE01 (480 mm/19 inch) flat panel display
|
||
|
||
Chapter 1
|
||
A Look at the Terminal 3
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
When connected to a host system, the monitor displays information you
|
||
send to the host system and information the host system sends to you.
|
||
For more information about your monitor, see your monitor’s installation
|
||
guide.
|
||
|
||
Keyboard
|
||
The LK401 keyboard has four groups of keys and two indicator lights.
|
||
The keyboard cable connects to the system box. Chapter 8 describes the
|
||
keyboard.
|
||
|
||
Mouse
|
||
The mouse is a three-button pointing device. You use the mouse to make
|
||
selections from screen menus, enter data for graphics, or select points on
|
||
the screen. The mouse connects to the system box. Chapter 4 describes
|
||
how to use the mouse.
|
||
|
||
X Window Sessions and Video Terminal Sessions
|
||
You can use two types of sessions on your host computers:
|
||
X Window Session
|
||
To use an X window session, you log in to a host and use that host’s
|
||
X window software. In an X window session, you can use all the
|
||
applications and utilities provided in the X Window System. For more
|
||
information about Digital’s X applications, see the VMS DECwindows
|
||
User’s Guide or the ULTRIX Workstation (UWS) User’s Guide.
|
||
Video Terminal Session
|
||
You can use your VT1000 as a video text terminal. The VT1000 has
|
||
a video terminal (VTE) window that lets you log in to a host as you
|
||
would on a conventional video terminal. The VT1000’s VTE window
|
||
offers most of the features of Digital’s VT320 text terminal with some
|
||
enhancements.
|
||
You can open one X window session and several VTE sessions at the same
|
||
time.
|
||
|
||
X Window System and DECwindows
|
||
The X Window System is a graphically oriented user interface that
|
||
lets you display one or more windows on the screen. Each window can
|
||
represent a different software application running on its own host system.
|
||
For example, you could run a word processing application in one window
|
||
and a spreadsheet application in another window. With windows, you can
|
||
perform many tasks in an easy and efficient manner.
|
||
|
||
Chapter 1
|
||
4 A Look at the Terminal
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
The X Window System was designed at the Massachusetts Institute
|
||
of Technology. Digital’s DECwindows software is based on and fully
|
||
compatible with the X Window System.
|
||
|
||
System Requirements
|
||
You can use your terminal with the VMS, ULTRIX, and UNIX based
|
||
systems.
|
||
|
||
VMS Systems: LAT Protocol
|
||
The VMS operating system is one of Digital’s operating systems. To make
|
||
network connections to a VMS host system, use the local area transport
|
||
(LAT) protocol. LAT is a communications protocol for connecting to VMS
|
||
host systems.
|
||
To open a video terminal (VTE) session: You can use any version of the
|
||
VMS operating system.
|
||
To open an X window session: You must have VMS Version 5.3-1 or higher
|
||
installed on your system, and your system manager must enable certain
|
||
options (Appendix D).
|
||
|
||
UNIX and ULTRIX Systems: TCP/IP TELNET Protocol
|
||
The UNIX operating system was created by AT&T and is used throughout
|
||
the computer industry. The ULTRIX operating system created by Digitial
|
||
is based on the UNIX operating system. To make network connections
|
||
to a UNIX or ULTRIX host, you normally use the transmission control
|
||
program/Internet protocol (TCP/IP) networking software. TCP/IP is the
|
||
preferred communication protocol for UNIX-based systems.
|
||
The VT1000 uses the TCP/IP TELNET protocol to make network
|
||
connections to UNIX-based host systems. TELNET is the TCP/IP protocol
|
||
that lets terminals connect to host systems in a wide-area network.
|
||
To open a video terminal session: You can use any version of UNIX or
|
||
ULTRIX.
|
||
To open an X window session: You can use any version of UNIX to open
|
||
an X window session, as long as any X11R3 client is installed on that
|
||
host. ULTRIX workstation (UWS) versions 2.1 and higher include an
|
||
X11R3 client.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 1
|
||
A Look at the Terminal 5
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
How the VT1000 Works
|
||
You can use the VT1000 with one or more computer systems. You have
|
||
several options for connecting your terminal to a computer. You can
|
||
connect the terminal directly to a computer through one of two serial
|
||
ports, or you can connect the terminal indirectly through an Ethernet
|
||
network using the ThinWire port.
|
||
The computer system you connect to is called the host. You can connect
|
||
several VT1000 terminals to a single host or connect one VT1000 terminal
|
||
to several hosts.
|
||
You use the keyboard and mouse to interact with applications on your
|
||
system. You send data to the application by typing on the keyboard or
|
||
selecting window options with the mouse. Data sent by the application
|
||
appears as text or graphics on the screen. You can print text or graphics
|
||
from the VT1000.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 1
|
||
6 A Look at the Terminal
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
You can use a variety of host software applications on the VT1000. For
|
||
example, your host may have applications for word processing, data entry,
|
||
programming, or business graphics. Most applications involve interactive
|
||
processing. This means the VT1000 immediately sends the information
|
||
you enter from the mouse or keyboard to the host.
|
||
Applications use programming functions to perform many operations. The
|
||
VT1000 can work with standard American National Standards Institute
|
||
(ANSI) functions. See Chapter 10.
|
||
|
||
VT1000 Terminal Highlights
|
||
The VT1000 terminal is a four-piece desktop unit that provides many
|
||
of the features of a workstation. The VT1000 provides you with the
|
||
following features:
|
||
• A workstation-style display, resolution, keyboard, and mouse
|
||
• An X Window System desktop server for efficient interaction with
|
||
DECwindows and X window applications
|
||
• A local window manager that lets you move and resize windows
|
||
• A local terminal manager that lets you create, manage, and delete
|
||
connections to hosts
|
||
• A local video terminal (VTE) window that lets you use the VT1000 as
|
||
a conventional video terminal
|
||
• Access to VMS, ULTRIX, and UNIX operating system software at the
|
||
same time
|
||
• Serial interfaces for a keyboard and a mouse or tablet
|
||
• Two serial lines with DEC-423 connectors for serial host
|
||
communication and printer support, like a traditional terminal
|
||
• A ThinWire Ethernet port to connect to an Ethernet network
|
||
• An optional RAM board that provides up to 3 megabytes of added
|
||
memory storage
|
||
The RAM board is user installable.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 1
|
||
A Look at the Terminal 7
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Customizing Your Terminal
|
||
The VT1000 lets you check and control the settings of the terminal’s
|
||
operating features. You can
|
||
• Change individual feature settings.
|
||
• Recall factory-default settings or your own stored settings from
|
||
memory.
|
||
• Make temporary changes for the current session or store new settings
|
||
for all future sessions.
|
||
Chapter 7 describes how to customize your VT1000.
|
||
|
||
Compatibility with VT Series Terminals
|
||
The VT1000 can operate as a video text terminal when you want to log
|
||
in to a host system as you would with a conventional video terminal. You
|
||
can use the VT1000 as one of Digital’s VT320, VT220, VT102, VT101,
|
||
or VT100 text terminals. Chapter 5 describes the video terminal (VTE)
|
||
window and how to use it.
|
||
|
||
Character Sets
|
||
When you use video terminal (VTE) windows, you can choose different
|
||
character sets to match your computer system or software application
|
||
requirements. You can choose from:
|
||
• Two 8-bit multinational character sets—DEC Multinational or the
|
||
the ISO Latin Alphabet No. 1 set of the International Standards
|
||
Organization
|
||
• Several 7-bit national replacement character sets (NRCs) for Western
|
||
European languages
|
||
Chapter 5 describes how to choose characters sets.
|
||
|
||
Programming the VT1000 Terminal
|
||
The VT1000 video terminal (VTE) windows emulate Digital’s VT320 text
|
||
terminal. The VT320 Programmer Reference Manual explains the control
|
||
functions used to access the terminal’s video terminal (VTE) window
|
||
features. Chapter 10 of this user guide is a summary of VT1000 specific
|
||
control functions and commands. Programmers use these functions in
|
||
their applications.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
7
|
||
Installing Your
|
||
VT1000 Video Terminal
|
||
22
|
||
Installing Your Terminal
|
||
|
||
|
||
This chapter provides step-by-step instructions on how to:
|
||
Prepare for installation.
|
||
Unpack, inspect, and check the terminal’s components.
|
||
Connect your terminal to a monitor, mouse, and keyboard.
|
||
Connect your terminal to a network.
|
||
Turn on your terminal.
|
||
Connect an optional printer, modem, or tablet.
|
||
Install an optional memory board.
|
||
Carefully read all installation instructions before you turn on the power.
|
||
|
||
Site Preparation
|
||
Before you install your VT1000 video terminal, make sure your computer
|
||
system has the necessary network hardware and system software to
|
||
support the terminal. See your system manager to make sure these
|
||
requirements are met.
|
||
|
||
For System Managers
|
||
System managers need to prepare the system for use with the VT1000
|
||
video terminal. Appendix D describes the required tasks.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 2 11
|
||
12 Installing Your Terminal
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Network Hardware Support
|
||
The VT1000 video terminal requires one of the following physical
|
||
connections to connect to a host computer system:
|
||
|
||
ThinWire Lets the VT1000 operate with X window applications and multiple
|
||
connector text terminal sessions, using either the LAT or TCP/IP network
|
||
protocol. You must use the ThinWire connector to operate with X
|
||
window or DECwindows software.
|
||
Serial Lets the VT1000 connect to a single host or terminal server as a
|
||
line traditional text terminal.
|
||
|
||
System Software Support
|
||
The following table summarizes the system resources needed to open X
|
||
window sessions or video terminal (VTE) sessions:
|
||
|
||
Operating Communication
|
||
Operation System Protocol
|
||
|
||
Video terminal session VMS Version 4.0 LAT
|
||
|
||
|
||
UNIX (any version) TELNET (TCP/IP)
|
||
|
||
|
||
ULTRIX (any version) TELNET (TCP/IP)
|
||
UWS Version 2.2 LAT
|
||
|
||
|
||
X window session VMS Version 5.3-1 LAT
|
||
or higher
|
||
|
||
|
||
UNIX (any version) TCP/IP
|
||
TFTP (UDP) for font
|
||
service
|
||
|
||
|
||
UWS Version 2.1 TCP/IP
|
||
(includes ULTRIX TFTP (UDP) for font
|
||
Version 3.1) or higher service
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 2
|
||
Installing Your Terminal 13
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Selecting a Location
|
||
Use the following guidelines to select a good location for your terminal:
|
||
• Select a surface area that is large enough to hold your system box,
|
||
monitor, keyboard, and mouse.
|
||
• Select a location near ac power outlets and communication connectors.
|
||
• Keep your terminal away from heaters, photocopiers, direct sunlight,
|
||
and abrasive particles.
|
||
• Do not block the air vents on the sides of the system box or place the
|
||
system box on its side. Blocking the air vents can cause the system to
|
||
overheat.
|
||
• To avoid screen glare, select a place where bright light will not reflect
|
||
off the monitor.
|
||
• Place your monitor so that the top line of the monitor display is at eye
|
||
level.
|
||
• Keep the air well circulated, to prevent excess heat and dust from
|
||
accumulating.
|
||
• Keep the temperature between 10° and 40° C (50° and 104° F), and
|
||
the relative humidity between 10% and 95%.
|
||
• Keep the area clean. Do not place food or liquid on or near your
|
||
terminal.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 2
|
||
14 Installing Your Terminal
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Installation
|
||
|
||
Unpack and check the contents of each carton.
|
||
1. Look for external damage on the shipping cartons, such as dents,
|
||
holes or crushed corners.
|
||
2. Unpack the shipping cartons.
|
||
|
||
WARNING
|
||
If necessary, use two people to lift or move the monitor out of
|
||
the shipping carton. The approximate weight of the monitor
|
||
is
|
||
• VR150 monitor (380 mm/15 inch): 16 kg (36 lb)
|
||
• VR262 monitor (480 mm/19 inch): 18 kg (40 lb)
|
||
• VR315 monitor (380 mm/15 inch): 13 kg (29 lb)
|
||
• VR319 monitor (480 mm/19 inch): 27 kg (60 lb)
|
||
• VRE01 monitor (480 mm/19 inch): 8 kg (15 lb)
|
||
3. Make sure you have all the items shown in the following figure.
|
||
Carefully inspect the components for shipping damage. If you have
|
||
missing or damaged items, contact your sales representative and
|
||
delivery agent.
|
||
|
||
CAUTION
|
||
If you received optional memory boards, do not remove them
|
||
from the antistatic bag at this time. Static electricity can
|
||
damage memory boards.
|
||
4. Save the empty shipping cartons and packing material for repacking,
|
||
in case you move or relocate your terminal.
|
||
|
||
Install any optional memory first.
|
||
If you ordered additional memory for your terminal, go to the ‘‘Installing
|
||
Memory ’’ section at the end of this chapter. You should install memory
|
||
boards in the system box before proceeding.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 2
|
||
Installing Your Terminal 15
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
1 2 3
|
||
|
||
|
||
TM
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
4 5
|
||
TM
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
i t al
|
||
di g
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
6 7 8 9
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
10 11 12 13
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
GSF_0822_89.DG
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 2
|
||
16 Installing Your Terminal
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
VT1000 Parts Checklist
|
||
|
||
1 Monitor: VR150, VR262, VR315, VR319, or VRE01
|
||
2 System box power cord
|
||
3 Monitor installation guide
|
||
4 System box
|
||
5 Mouse
|
||
6 DEC-423 communication cable
|
||
7 Monitor cable
|
||
8 Monitor power cord
|
||
9 Keyboard and legend strip
|
||
10 Ethernet cable and connector
|
||
11 EIA adapter (DEC-423 6-pin to 25-pin)
|
||
12 Installing and Using the VT1000 Video Terminal
|
||
13 Rear dress panel
|
||
Options (See ‘‘Installing Memory ’’ )
|
||
Memory controller board (comes with one SIMM card preinstalled)
|
||
SIMM card(s)
|
||
|
||
NOTE
|
||
If you receive three power cords (a short one and two long ones),
|
||
the second long power cord is not needed for this installation.
|
||
|
||
Place the system box on a level surface. Place the monitor
|
||
on top of the system box.
|
||
Leave enough room at the rear of the system box and monitor for
|
||
connecting cables.
|
||
|
||
WARNING
|
||
If necessary, use two people to lift or move the monitor.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 2
|
||
Installing Your Terminal 17
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Connect the cables to the system box.
|
||
Perform the following steps to connect cables and prepare the system box
|
||
for use. The steps are keyed to the figures.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
1 Connect one end of the monitor cable to the monitor and the other end
|
||
to the system box.
|
||
If you have a VR262 or VRE01 monitor, attach the cable-holding
|
||
fixture to the rear of the monitor before connecting the cable.
|
||
2 Set the monitor selection switch to match your monitor.
|
||
|
||
Monitor Switch Position
|
||
|
||
VR150 1
|
||
VR262 3
|
||
VR315 5
|
||
VR319 2
|
||
VRE01 3
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 2
|
||
18 Installing Your Terminal
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
3 Connect the mouse or graphics tablet to the system box.
|
||
4 Connect the keyboard to the system box. Lower the keyboard’s legs
|
||
and install the legend strip for the top-row keys.
|
||
5 Serial printer port: If you have a printer or secondary host computer,
|
||
connect the printer or host to the system box.
|
||
6 Serial host port: If you have a primary host computer or terminal
|
||
server, connect the host or server to the system box.
|
||
7 Connect the ThinWire Ethernet cable’s T-connector to the system box.
|
||
Connect the other end of the cable to your local area network.
|
||
Serial Baud Rate For serial communication, the VT1000 line speed is
|
||
initially set to a baud rate of 9600. Use the setting that matches your
|
||
host system. To set the serial baud rate, see ‘‘Changing Your Host Port or
|
||
Printer Port Settings’’ in Chapter 7.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 2
|
||
Installing Your Terminal 19
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
8 Make sure the | /O power switches on the system box and monitor
|
||
are off (O). Then connect the long power cord to the system box and a
|
||
grounded electrical outlet.
|
||
9 Connect the short power cord to the monitor and the system box.
|
||
10 Route all cables under the dress panel. Then push the dress panel
|
||
onto the rear of the system box.
|
||
11 Turn the monitor’s | /O power switch on by pressing ( | ). Turn the
|
||
system box’s | /O power switch on by pressing ( | ).
|
||
The keyboard sounds a bell tone, and a pie graph gradually fills in as
|
||
the terminal performs its self-tests.
|
||
When the tests are done, the keyboard bell tone sounds again and the
|
||
VT1000 Terminal Manager window appears.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 2
|
||
20 Installing Your Terminal
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Final steps . . .
|
||
• If you had problems with the installation, review the installation steps
|
||
carefully. If the problem continues, refer to Chapter 11.
|
||
• This is a good time to set the brightness, contrast, and viewing angle
|
||
of your monitor. See your monitor’s installation guide for instructions.
|
||
• If you installed optional RAM memory, use the procedure at the end
|
||
of this chapter to verify that the system recognizes the additional
|
||
memory.
|
||
Otherwise, the installation procedure is complete. You can go to Chapter 3
|
||
to begin using your VT1000 video terminal.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 2
|
||
Installing Your Terminal 21
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Installing Memory
|
||
This section describes how to install memory boards in the system box.
|
||
You can install
|
||
• Additional random access memory (RAM)
|
||
• A new read-only memory (ROM) board containing updated firmware
|
||
The VT1000 video terminal comes with 1 megabyte of RAM memory. You
|
||
can add 1, 2, or 3 megabytes of optional RAM memory. Each megabyte
|
||
of optional memory comes on a 1-megabyte single in-line memory module
|
||
(SIMM) card. The SIMM cards install on the RAM memory controller
|
||
board.
|
||
|
||
Unpack and check the contents of the box.
|
||
• If you are installing additional RAM memory, you receive a
|
||
memory controller board with a 1-megabyte SIMM card installed. If
|
||
you ordered more than 1 megabyte of RAM memory, you also receive
|
||
one or two loose SIMM cards. Each SIMM card holds 1-megabyte
|
||
of RAM memory. You will install the SIMM cards on the memory
|
||
controller board later.
|
||
• If you are installing a ROM board, you receive a ROM board.
|
||
Carefully inspect the components for shipping damage. If you have any
|
||
missing or damaged items, contact your sales representative and delivery
|
||
agent.
|
||
|
||
CAUTION
|
||
The memory boards and the SIMM cards can be damaged by
|
||
electrostatic discharge. Handle the memory board by its cover or
|
||
strap. Handle the SIMM card by the side edges of the card.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 2
|
||
22 Installing Your Terminal
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Remove the system box cover.
|
||
1. Use a grounding wrist strap and an antistatic mat to perform the
|
||
installation, if available. Otherwise, frequently touch the metal
|
||
chassis of the system box during installation, to neutralize any
|
||
existing static charges.
|
||
2. Turn the system box’s | /O power switch off (O).
|
||
3. Turn the monitor’s | /O power switch off (O).
|
||
4. Disconnect the two power cords from the rear of the system box.
|
||
5. Disconnect the monitor video cable from the rear of the monitor.
|
||
6. Remove the monitor from the top of the system box. You may need
|
||
two people.
|
||
7. Release the top cover of the system box by pressing in the two push
|
||
tabs on the side of the box with the power switch, as shown.
|
||
8. Slowly lift the top cover until you release the hinges on the other side
|
||
of the box. Then lift the top cover completely off the system box.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
234
|
||
1 5
|
||
6
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
22%
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
GSF_0839_89.DG
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 2
|
||
Installing Your Terminal 23
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Identify the components in the system box.
|
||
There are four major components in the system box. The memory
|
||
controller board is shown installed. SIMM cards install on the other
|
||
side of the memory controller board.
|
||
If you are installing optional RAM memory, go to the next section.
|
||
If you are installing a ROM board, go to the section ‘‘Installing the
|
||
ROM Board.’’
|
||
|
||
System Box Components
|
||
|
||
1 System logic board
|
||
2 RAM memory controller board
|
||
3 ROM board
|
||
4 Power supply
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
2
|
||
|
||
|
||
3
|
||
1
|
||
4
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
234
|
||
1 5
|
||
6
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
22%
|
||
|
||
|
||
GSF_1362_89.DG
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 2
|
||
24 Installing Your Terminal
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Installing the RAM Memory Controller Board
|
||
CAUTION
|
||
The memory controller board and the SIMM cards can be
|
||
damaged by electrostatic discharge. Handle the memory
|
||
controller board by its cover or strap. Avoid contact with any
|
||
components or circuitry within the system box.
|
||
|
||
If your system already has a memory controller board, remove it.
|
||
1. Release the standoff clips by gently pushing each clip away from the
|
||
board and lifting up on the edges of the board.
|
||
2. Grasp the strap of the memory controller board and pull up firmly to
|
||
release the memory controller board connector from the system logic
|
||
board.
|
||
3. Place the board on top of the power supply’s metal cover, with the
|
||
strap side down. You will use the metal cover as a work surface to
|
||
perform the SIMM board installation.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
38%
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
GSF_0957_89.DG
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 2
|
||
Installing Your Terminal 25
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Install the SIMM cards on the memory controller board.
|
||
If you ordered 1 megabyte of memory, you can skip this procedure. If you
|
||
ordered 2 or 3 megabytes of memory, you must install one or two SIMM
|
||
cards on the memory controller board.
|
||
1. Remove the new memory controller board and the one or two small
|
||
SIMM cards from the shipping bag.
|
||
2. Place them on top of the power supply’s metal cover, with the strap
|
||
side of the memory controller board facing down. Use the metal
|
||
cover as a work surface to install the SIMM cards. This prevents
|
||
electrostatic damage.
|
||
3. The memory controller board has one SIMM card preinstalled in the
|
||
connector labeled 2MB. Install the next SIMM card in the connector
|
||
labeled 3MB and the last SIMM card in the connector labeled 4MB,
|
||
as follows:
|
||
|
||
CAUTION
|
||
SIMM cards can be damaged by electrostatic discharge.
|
||
Handle the SIMM card by the side edges of the card. Avoid
|
||
contact with the gold contact fingers on the card.
|
||
a. Insert the SIMM card into the connector at a 45-degree angle.
|
||
Face the components on the SIMM card toward the components
|
||
on the memory controller board. Line up the center key slot on
|
||
the SIMM card with the connector key on the memory controller
|
||
board.
|
||
b. Push down on the top of the SIMM card to securely seat the card
|
||
in the connector.
|
||
c. Raise the SIMM card into a standup position, until both sides of
|
||
the card lock into the connector tabs.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 2
|
||
26 Installing Your Terminal
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
4M
|
||
B
|
||
3M
|
||
B
|
||
2M
|
||
B
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
%
|
||
70
|
||
at
|
||
DG
|
||
T.
|
||
DI
|
||
_E
|
||
RD
|
||
OA
|
||
_B
|
||
M
|
||
RA
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
3M
|
||
B
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
3M
|
||
B
|
||
|
||
GSF_0840_89.DG
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
To remove the SIMM card: Gently push outward on the tabs at the
|
||
sides of the connector. Tilt the SIMM card forward at a 45-degree angle,
|
||
toward the edge of the RAM board. Grasp the edges of the SIMM card
|
||
firmly and lift the card out of the connector.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 2
|
||
Installing Your Terminal 27
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Install the memory controller board into the system box.
|
||
1. Grasp the strap of the memory controller board.
|
||
2. Carefully place the board on top of its connector and standoffs in the
|
||
system box. Use the standoffs as guides to align the connector on the
|
||
board with the connector in the system box.
|
||
3. Press down firmly on the board and its edges to seat the connector
|
||
and lock each of the four standoff clips.
|
||
4. Go to the section ‘‘Replace the system box cover.’’
|
||
|
||
NOTE
|
||
If you have problems, recheck the installation procedures
|
||
carefully. If the problem continues, contact Digital Customer
|
||
Services.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
GSF_0842_89.DG
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 2
|
||
28 Installing Your Terminal
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Installing the ROM Board
|
||
CAUTION
|
||
The ROM board can be damaged by electrostatic discharge.
|
||
Handle the ROM board by its cover or strap. Also avoid contact
|
||
with any components or circuitry in the system box.
|
||
|
||
Remove the old ROM board from your system box.
|
||
1. Release the standoff clips by gently pushing each clip away from the
|
||
board and lifting up on the edges of the board.
|
||
2. Grasp the strap of the ROM board and pull up firmly to release the
|
||
ROM board connector from the system logic board.
|
||
3. Place the board on top of the power supply’s metal cover, with the
|
||
strap side down.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
38%
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
22% of full size
|
||
then imod scaled at 1.5
|
||
|
||
Use REMOVE_ROM_BASE.DG for fixes
|
||
|
||
GSF_0958_89.DG
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 2
|
||
Installing Your Terminal 29
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Install the new ROM board into the system box.
|
||
1. Remove the new ROM board from the box and shipping bag.
|
||
2. Grasp the strap of the new ROM board.
|
||
3. Carefully place the board on top of the ROM connector and standoffs
|
||
in the system box. Use the standoffs as guides to align the connector
|
||
on the board with the connector in the system box.
|
||
4. Press down firmly on the board and its edges to seat the connector
|
||
and lock each of the four standoff clips.
|
||
5. Continue to the next section to replace the system box cover.
|
||
|
||
Replace the system box cover.
|
||
1. From the rear of the system box, place the left side of the top cover
|
||
onto the hinge tabs in the left side of the system box.
|
||
2. Gently lower the right side of the top cover onto the system box. Make
|
||
sure the power connector frame slides into the slot behind the power
|
||
connectors.
|
||
3. Push down on the right side of the top cover until it snaps into the
|
||
two push tabs, locking it in place.
|
||
|
||
After Installing the Memory Controller Board or ROM Board...
|
||
If you are installing the VT1000 terminal, go back to the beginning of this
|
||
chapter and continue the installation procedure.
|
||
If not, perform the following steps:
|
||
1. Place the monitor on top of the system box. Leave enough room to
|
||
connect cables on the rear of the system box and monitor.
|
||
2. Connect the two power cords to the rear of the system box.
|
||
3. Connect the monitor video cable to the rear of monitor.
|
||
4. Turn on the system box’s | /O power switch by pressing ( | ).
|
||
5. Turn on the monitor’s | /O power switch by pressing ( | ).
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 2
|
||
30 Installing Your Terminal
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Verifying the Installation of Optional RAM Memory
|
||
The VT1000 Terminal Manager window should be displayed on your
|
||
screen.
|
||
Verify that the number on the right side of the Memory Remaining scale
|
||
displays the correct number of total megabytes in your system.
|
||
Standard + Optional = Number Displayed
|
||
1 megabyte 1 megabyte 2M
|
||
2 megabytes 3M
|
||
3 megabytes 4M
|
||
|
||
NOTE
|
||
If you have problems, recheck the installation procedures
|
||
carefully. If the problem continues, contact Digital Customer
|
||
Services.
|
||
|
||
The installation procedure for optional memory is complete.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 2
|
||
33
|
||
Getting Started
|
||
|
||
|
||
This chapter provides step-by-step procedures on how to begin using your
|
||
terminal with a host computer. The chapter also introduces some of the
|
||
VT1000 screens and menus.
|
||
If you are unfamiliar with using windows and a mouse, you may want to
|
||
read the information in Chapter 4 before continuing.
|
||
Before you start, you should set the terminal to use the desired display
|
||
language and keyboard type. By default, the terminal uses the English
|
||
language and the North American keyboard type.
|
||
You can use your VT1000 with the VMS, ULTRIX, or UNIX operating
|
||
systems. You can open two types of sessions on these systems—a video
|
||
terminal session or X window session.
|
||
The chapter includes sections on:
|
||
• VT1000 Terminal Manager window
|
||
• Choosing the correct display language
|
||
• Choosing the correct keyboard type
|
||
• Opening a session on a VMS host system
|
||
• Opening a session on a UNIX or ULTRIX host system
|
||
• Ending a session
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 3 31
|
||
32 Getting Started
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
VT1000 Terminal Manager Window
|
||
When you turn on the terminal, it displays the VT1000 Terminal Manager
|
||
window after running some self-tests. You use the VT1000 Terminal
|
||
Manager window to start every session. The menu bar of this window
|
||
contains the names of four pull-down menus: Session, Create, Customize,
|
||
and Print Screen.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
In this chapter, you will use the Session menu. Chapter 6 provides
|
||
more details on how to use the VT1000 Terminal Manager. Chapter 7
|
||
describes how to customize the VT1000 Terminal Manager for your
|
||
working environment.
|
||
|
||
Choosing the Display Language
|
||
You can display the VT1000 Terminal Manager window, system messages,
|
||
and other menus in English, French, or German. The display language is
|
||
initially set to English.
|
||
To change the display language:
|
||
1. Turn on the terminal. The VT1000 Terminal Manager window
|
||
appears.
|
||
2. Point to the Customize menu name in the VT1000 Terminal
|
||
Manager’s menu bar. Click and hold MB1 to pull down the Customize
|
||
menu.
|
||
Chapter 3
|
||
Getting Started 33
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
3. In the Customize menu, drag the pointer to the Language . . . menu
|
||
item. Release MB1. The Customize Language dialog box appears.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
GSF_1047_89.RAGS
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
4. In the Customize Language dialog box, click on the button next to
|
||
your language choice.
|
||
5. Click on the OK button to record your choice and dismiss the
|
||
Customize Language dialog box.
|
||
6. Save your setting so you do not have to enter it each time you turn on
|
||
the terminal.
|
||
• Pull down the Customize menu from the VT1000 Terminal
|
||
Manager’s menu bar.
|
||
• Choose the Save Current Settings menu item.
|
||
|
||
Choosing the Correct Keyboard Type
|
||
The VT1000 has many keyboard types for different languages
|
||
and dialects. The terminal is initially set to work with the North
|
||
American/United Kingdom keyboard. If you have another keyboard,
|
||
you must change the setting.
|
||
To change the keyboard type:
|
||
1. Turn on the terminal. The VT1000 Terminal Manager window
|
||
appears.
|
||
|
||
Chapter 3
|
||
34 Getting Started
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
2. Point to the Customize menu in the VT1000 Terminal Manager’s
|
||
menu bar. Click and hold MB1 to pull down the Customize menu.
|
||
3. In the Customize menu, drag the pointer to the Keyboard . . . menu
|
||
item. Release MB1. The Customize Keyboard dialog box appears.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
GSF_1046_89.RAGS
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
4. Turn the keyboard upside down and look for a label that specifies the
|
||
model number. The model number should be in a format similar to
|
||
LK401-xx or nn-nnnnn-xx. Use the xx value to choose your keyboard
|
||
type from the Keyboard Type scroll box.
|
||
|
||
|
||
For example, if you have a British keyboard and the model number is
|
||
LK401-AA, you choose LK401-AA British. (See Chapter 6 for details.)
|
||
|
||
5. In the Keyboard Type scroll box, click on the arrows until the
|
||
keyboard you want appears.
|
||
6. Click on the correct keyboard entry.
|
||
7. Click on the OK button to record your choice and dismiss the
|
||
Customize Keyboard dialog box.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 3
|
||
Getting Started 35
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
8. Save your setting so you do not have to enter it each time you turn on
|
||
the terminal.
|
||
• Pull down the Customize menu from the VT1000 Terminal
|
||
Manager’s menu bar.
|
||
• Choose the Save Current Settings menu item.
|
||
|
||
Starting a Session on Your Host System
|
||
You can use your terminal to open sessions on the VMS, ULTRIX, or
|
||
UNIX operating systems.
|
||
You can run two types of sessions on a host computer with your terminal:
|
||
Video Terminal Sessions
|
||
You can use your VT1000 as a video text terminal. The VT1000
|
||
has a video terminal (VTE) window that lets you log in to a host
|
||
as you would on a conventional video terminal. The VT1000’s VTE
|
||
window offers the features of Digital’s VT320 terminal with some
|
||
enhancements.
|
||
X Window Sessions
|
||
To use an X window session, you log in to a host and use that host’s
|
||
X window software. In an X window session, you can use all the
|
||
applications and utilities provided in the X Window System.
|
||
You can run an X window session and a VTE session at the same time.
|
||
The X window session appears in one window, while the VTE session
|
||
appears in another. You can only run one X session at a time. You can
|
||
run several VTE sessions at a time.
|
||
The following sections show you how to:
|
||
• Start a video terminal or X window session on a VMS system.
|
||
• Start a video terminal or X window session on an ULTRIX or UNIX
|
||
system.
|
||
• Start a video terminal session using the serial host port.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 3
|
||
36 Getting Started
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Starting a Video Terminal or X Window Session
|
||
on a VMS System
|
||
This section describes how to start a video terminal (VTE) or an X window
|
||
session on a VMS host system, using a local area transport (LAT).
|
||
If you are using the VT1000 for the first time, you will need to enter one
|
||
or more LAT group codes to begin either type of session. If you want to
|
||
begin an X window session, you will also need to enter a LAT font path.
|
||
Your system manager can provide you with the group codes and font path
|
||
for your network.
|
||
1. Turn on the terminal. The VT1000 Terminal Manager window
|
||
appears.
|
||
2. To connect to a host or service on the network, you need to enter and
|
||
save one or more LAT group codes in the terminal’s memory. If you
|
||
have already entered the group codes, go to step 6.
|
||
Point to the Customize menu name in the VT1000 Terminal
|
||
Manager’s menu bar. Click and hold MB1 to pull down the Customize
|
||
menu.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
GSF_1710_89.RAGS
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
3. Drag the pointer to the LAT . . . menu item. Release MB1. The
|
||
Customize LAT dialog box appears.
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 3
|
||
Getting Started 37
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
4. Enter a group code into the Customize LAT dialog box.
|
||
• Use your keyboard to enter the group code into the text entry
|
||
field.
|
||
• Click on the Add button. The new group code appears in the
|
||
Group Codes scroll box.
|
||
• Repeat this procedure for each group code you want to add.
|
||
• Click on the OK button to dismiss the Customize LAT dialog box.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 3
|
||
38 Getting Started
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
5. Save your group code(s) so you do not have to enter them each time
|
||
you turn on the terminal.
|
||
• Pull down the Customize menu from the VT1000 Terminal
|
||
Manager’s menu bar.
|
||
• Choose the Save Current Settings menu item.
|
||
6. If you want to begin an X window session, you need to enter and save
|
||
a LAT font path. Some X applications require special character fonts
|
||
to run properly. A font path lets the terminal access these character
|
||
fonts from a host. If you have already entered a font path, go to step
|
||
9.
|
||
Pull down the Customize menu and choose the Font Path . . . menu
|
||
item. The Customize Font Path dialog box appears.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
7. Enter a font path into the Customize Font Path dialog box.
|
||
• The LAT Font Path text entry field already has the word ROM
|
||
entered. Enter a comma (,) followed by a font host name and two
|
||
colons.
|
||
For example:
|
||
|ROM,BETA::
|
||
------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 3
|
||
Getting Started 39
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
• Click on the OK button to dismiss the Customize Font Path dialog
|
||
box.
|
||
You may have to wait several minutes before the message Set font
|
||
path succeeded appears in the Messages area of the VT1000 Terminal
|
||
Manager window. Sometimes it takes a few minutes for the terminal
|
||
to receive the message identifying the font path host. The terminal
|
||
retries every 30 seconds for 2.5 minutes. If the wait is too long, your
|
||
system manager may be able to increase the host’s multicast message
|
||
frequency.
|
||
8. Save the font path so you do not have to enter it each time you turn
|
||
on the terminal.
|
||
• Pull down the Customize menu.
|
||
• Choose the Save Current Settings menu item.
|
||
9. Point to the Create menu name in the VT1000 Terminal Manager’s
|
||
menu bar. Click and hold MB1 to pull down the Create menu.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
10. To begin a VTE session, choose the LAT Terminal Window . . .
|
||
menu item. The LAT Terminal Window Service Select dialog box
|
||
appears.
|
||
To begin an X window session, choose the LAT X Session . . . menu
|
||
item. The LAT X Session Service Select dialog box appears.
|
||
The two dialog boxes are similar. Here is the LAT Terminal Window
|
||
Service Select dialog box:
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 3
|
||
40 Getting Started
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
11. Choose a host system and connect to it.
|
||
The names of the hosts you can access appear in the scroll box at the
|
||
top of the dialog box. The host names should correspond to the group
|
||
codes you have entered.
|
||
|
||
Step Result
|
||
|
||
1 Find the name Each time you click on the scroll bar, the scroll
|
||
of the host you box displays more host names if available.
|
||
want to log in to.
|
||
If necessary, click
|
||
on the scroll bar
|
||
to display more
|
||
names.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 3
|
||
Getting Started 41
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Step Result
|
||
|
||
NOTE
|
||
You may have to wait several minutes before the host you want
|
||
appears. Click on the Update Known Services button to update the
|
||
scroll box. If the wait is too long, see your system manager.
|
||
2 Click on the name The host name becomes highlighted in the scroll
|
||
of the host you box and appears in the text entry field at the
|
||
want to log into. bottom of the window.
|
||
3 Click on the Add The host name is added to the Preferred
|
||
button. Services scroll box. You can add up to 4 hosts
|
||
that you frequently log in to.
|
||
4 Click on the Save The VT1000 saves the host names you added
|
||
button. to the Preferred Services scroll box, so you do
|
||
not have to enter them each time you turn your
|
||
terminal on.
|
||
5 In the Preferred The host is selected for connection.
|
||
Services scroll box,
|
||
click on the host
|
||
you want to connect
|
||
to.
|
||
6 Click on the A video terminal (VTE) window or X window
|
||
Connect button. login prompt appears. You may have to press
|
||
the Return key several times before the login
|
||
prompt appears.
|
||
|
||
12. Log in to the VTE host or X window session with the same username
|
||
and password you use for video terminal sessions. After you log in to
|
||
an X window session, the host-based session manager starts up.
|
||
|
||
Starting a Video Terminal or X Window Session
|
||
on an ULTRIX or UNIX System
|
||
This section describes how to start a video terminal (VTE) session or
|
||
an X window session on a UNIX or ULTRIX host system, using TCP/IP
|
||
TELNET or TCP/IP.
|
||
If you are using the VT1000 for the first time, you need the following
|
||
information before you begin a session:
|
||
• An IP address to assign to your terminal
|
||
• One or more names or IP addresses for the host(s) you want to connect
|
||
to
|
||
• A font path file (for X window sessions only)
|
||
|
||
Chapter 3
|
||
42 Getting Started
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Your system manager can provide you with the IP addresses and a pointer
|
||
to a font path file.
|
||
1. Turn on the terminal. The VT1000 Terminal Manager window
|
||
appears.
|
||
2. Determine if you have to assign an IP address to your terminal.
|
||
• If BOOTP address resolution is available on your system, your
|
||
terminal can determine its own IP address at power-up. Ask your
|
||
system manager. If BOOTP is available, you can go to step 8.
|
||
• If BOOTP is not available, continue with step 4 to enter your
|
||
terminal’s IP address.
|
||
3. Point to the Customize menu name in the VT1000 Terminal
|
||
Manager’s menu bar. Click and hold MB1 to pull down the Customize
|
||
menu.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
GSF_1715_89.RAGS
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
4. Drag the pointer to the TCP/IP . . . menu item. Release MB1. The
|
||
Customize TCP/IP dialog box appears.
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 3
|
||
Getting Started 43
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
5. Enter an IP address and subnet mask.
|
||
• Enter your terminal’s IP address into the VT1000 IP Address
|
||
(manual) text entry field.
|
||
• Enter your IP subnet mask into the IP Subnet Mask text entry
|
||
field.
|
||
• Click on the OK button to dismiss the Customize TCP/IP dialog
|
||
box.
|
||
6. Save your IP address and subnet mask so you do not have to enter
|
||
them each time you turn on the terminal.
|
||
• Pull down the Customize menu from the VT1000 Terminal
|
||
Manager window.
|
||
• Choose the Save Current Settings menu item.
|
||
7. If you are starting a video terminal (VTE) session, go to step 11.
|
||
If you are starting an X window session, perform the following
|
||
steps to enter and save a font path in the VT1000 memory. If you
|
||
have already entered the font path, go to step 11.
|
||
Chapter 3
|
||
44 Getting Started
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Some applications require special character fonts to run properly. A
|
||
font path lets the VT1000 access these character fonts. You need to
|
||
enter and save a font path in the terminal’s memory. Your system
|
||
manager can provide the font path for your VT1000.
|
||
To enter a font path, pull down the Customize menu and choose the
|
||
Font Path . . . menu item. The Customize Font Path dialog box
|
||
appears.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
8. Enter a font path into the Customize Font Path dialog box.
|
||
• Click on the TFTP Font Path button under the Font Path
|
||
Selection title.
|
||
• The word ROM is already entered in the TFTP Font Path text entry
|
||
field. Enter a comma (,) a font host name or IP address, and a font
|
||
file specification. See your system manager for the information to
|
||
enter, if needed.
|
||
For example:
|
||
|ROM,123.45.67.89:/vt1000/100dpi/fonts.dir
|
||
--------------------------------------------
|
||
• Click on the OK button to dismiss the Customize Font Path
|
||
dialog box. A message appears in the Terminal Manager window
|
||
indicating the font path is being set.
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 3
|
||
Getting Started 45
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
9. Save the font path so you do not have to enter it each time you turn
|
||
on the terminal.
|
||
• Pull down the Customize menu from the VT1000 Terminal
|
||
Manager’s menu bar.
|
||
• Choose the Save Current Settings menu item.
|
||
10. Pull down the Create menu from the VT1000 Terminal Manager’s
|
||
menu bar.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
11. Choose the TELNET Terminal Window . . . menu item. The
|
||
TELNET Terminal Window Host Select dialog box appears.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 3
|
||
46 Getting Started
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
12. Under the IP Address and optional host name title, enter the IP
|
||
address(es) or names of the host(s) you want to connect to. If your
|
||
system has Name Servers, only names are needed. Ask your system
|
||
manager.
|
||
• Click on one of the text entry fields under the IP Address and
|
||
optional host name title. A text cursor appears.
|
||
• Enter the name or IP address of the host you want to connect to.
|
||
Your system manager can provide you with IP addresses or names
|
||
for the hosts on your network.
|
||
• Click on the Save button to save the information you enter, so you
|
||
do not have to enter them each time you turn the terminal on.
|
||
• Click on the button next to the name of the host you want to
|
||
connect to.
|
||
13. Click on the Connect button. A video terminal (VTE) window
|
||
appears.
|
||
14. Log in to the host as you would on a conventional video terminal.
|
||
15. If you want to run an X window application:
|
||
• Enter the appropriate commands to enable your terminal to run
|
||
an X window application:
|
||
If you are using the C-shell
|
||
|
||
% setenv DISPLAY your_terminal’s_IP_address:0
|
||
If you are using the Bourne or Korn shell
|
||
|
||
$ DISPLAY=your_terminal’s_IP_address:0
|
||
$ export DISPLAY
|
||
• Begin an X window application by entering the appropriate
|
||
command. For example, the following command starts a DECterm
|
||
application:
|
||
|
||
$ dxterm
|
||
• You can also run the DECwindows session manager from your
|
||
ULTRIX host by entering one of the following commands:
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 3
|
||
Getting Started 47
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
For UWS Version 2.1
|
||
|
||
$ dxsession -d your_terminal’s_IP_address:0
|
||
For UWS Version 2.2
|
||
|
||
$ dxsession
|
||
|
||
Starting a Video Terminal Session on the Serial Host Port
|
||
This section describes how to start a video terminal (VTE) session on a
|
||
VMS, UNIX, or ULTRIX host system if you use the serial host port.
|
||
1. Turn on the terminal. The VT1000 Terminal Manager window
|
||
appears.
|
||
2. Point to the Create menu name in the VT1000 Terminal Manager
|
||
window. Press and hold MB1 to pull down the Create menu.
|
||
3. Drag the pointer to the Terminal Window on Host Port menu item.
|
||
Release MB1. A video terminal (VTE) window appears.
|
||
4. Press the Return key until the login prompt appears.
|
||
5. Log in to the host as you would on a conventional video terminal.
|
||
|
||
Ending a Session
|
||
You can end a session at any point, by choosing the Quit menu item from
|
||
the Session menu of either the VT1000 Terminal Manager or the remote
|
||
session manager. In both cases, choosing Quit returns the terminal to its
|
||
initial start-up state.
|
||
End a session only after completing your work. When you end a session,
|
||
the terminal:
|
||
• Terminates all host connections.
|
||
• Deletes all windows on the screen.
|
||
• Performs a complete software reset.
|
||
• Displays the VT1000 terminal manager window.
|
||
To end your session:
|
||
1. Point to the Session menu name in the VT1000 Terminal Manager’s
|
||
menu bar. Press and hold MB1 to pull down the menu.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 3
|
||
48 Getting Started
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
2. Click on the Quit menu item. A dialog box appears, asking you if you
|
||
really want to end the session.
|
||
|
||
• To end the session, click on the Yes button.
|
||
• To remain in the session, click on the No button.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
48
|
||
Using Your
|
||
VT1000 Video Terminal
|
||
44
|
||
Using Windows
|
||
|
||
|
||
This chapter describes how to use and manipulate VT1000 windows.
|
||
The chapter includes sections on:
|
||
• Using the mouse
|
||
• What are windows
|
||
• Selecting and manipulating windows
|
||
• Choosing items from pull-down menus
|
||
• Supplying information in dialog boxes
|
||
• Using scroll bars
|
||
|
||
DECwindows Differences
|
||
The windowing features of the VT1000 Terminal Manager are a subset
|
||
of the features available in the DECwindows window manager. The
|
||
following features of the DECwindows window manager are not available:
|
||
• Ability to lock stacked windows in place
|
||
• Animation of icons shrinking or expanding
|
||
• Control of icon positions in the icon box
|
||
• Icon box pop-up menu
|
||
• Ability to control which window gets input focus when you expand
|
||
icons (The expanded icon automatically gets input focus.)
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 4 51
|
||
52 Using Windows
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Before You Start
|
||
When you work with windowing applications, you use your mouse to
|
||
perform many operations—from making menu selections to manipulating
|
||
windows on the screen.
|
||
|
||
Using the Mouse
|
||
Your mouse lets you move quickly and easily through windowing
|
||
applications. You simply point to an object on your screen and click a
|
||
button. The mouse has three buttons:
|
||
MB1 (mouse button 1) on the left
|
||
MB2 in the middle
|
||
MB3 on the right
|
||
This button arrangement normally suits right-handed users. If you are
|
||
left-handed, you can reverse the position of MB1 and MB3 by changing
|
||
the Button Arrangement setting in the Customize Pointer dialog box
|
||
(Chapter 7).
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
MB2
|
||
|
||
MB1 MB3
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
ZK−0250A−GE
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 4
|
||
Using Windows 53
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
In X window applications, you can perform six basic actions with the
|
||
mouse.
|
||
Point Move the mouse on your desk. This moves the cursor to
|
||
where you want the next action to occur.
|
||
Click Quickly press and release MB1. You should hear and
|
||
feel a faint click.
|
||
Press Point to a menu name or other item where you want the
|
||
action to occur. Without moving the mouse, press and
|
||
hold MB1. If you are pointing at a menu name, pressing
|
||
MB1 pulls down a menu and keeps it down until you
|
||
release MB1.
|
||
Drag Press and hold MB1, move the pointer, and release
|
||
MB1. For example, you drag a window outline to move
|
||
it to another place on your screen. To cancel a drag in
|
||
progress, click MB3 before releasing MB1. If you are
|
||
displaying a pull-down menu, cancel the drag by moving
|
||
the pointer outside the menu.
|
||
Double click Point to the object and click MB1 twice in quick
|
||
succession.
|
||
Shift click Point to the object. Press and hold the Shift key and
|
||
click MB1. Then release the Shift key.
|
||
You will get a chance to practice these movements when you open your
|
||
first session.
|
||
|
||
What Are Windows?
|
||
A window is an area on your screen that represents all or part of an
|
||
application. You can use windows to view several applications at once.
|
||
You can move windows on the screen, organizing information for easier
|
||
use. The video terminal (VTE) window is one of several windows available
|
||
on your VT1000 terminal.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 4
|
||
54 Using Windows
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Title Bar
|
||
Menu Bar
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Work
|
||
Area
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
GSF_1015_89.RAGS
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
• The title bar at the top identifies the window.
|
||
• The menu bar below the title bar lets you choose the application’s
|
||
commands.
|
||
• The work area displays the application’s text and graphics.
|
||
|
||
Using Windows
|
||
This section describes the basic techniques for manipulating windows,
|
||
including
|
||
• Selecting windows
|
||
• Moving windows
|
||
• Changing the size of windows
|
||
• Shrinking windows to icons and reexpanding them
|
||
• Working with stacked windows
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 4
|
||
Using Windows 55
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Selecting Windows
|
||
The VT1000 video terminal lets you open several windows on the screen.
|
||
When you have several windows open at one time, you give one window
|
||
input focus by selecting it. Only one window can have input focus at a
|
||
time. Input focus allows you to enter information from your keyboard or
|
||
mouse into the window.
|
||
|
||
Window with Input Focus
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Window without Input Focus
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
GSF_1024_89.RAGS
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
To select a window:
|
||
1. Point to any location in the window or title bar.
|
||
2. Click MB1.
|
||
The window’s title bar becomes highlighted to indicate it has input focus.
|
||
Any text you type appears in this window, if your application allows text
|
||
entry. When you select another window, the first window’s title bar is no
|
||
longer highlighted.
|
||
|
||
Moving Windows
|
||
You use the title bar to move the windows on your screen. Windows can
|
||
overlap one another. If one window partially obscures another, you may
|
||
want to arrange them so that each is completely visible.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 4
|
||
56 Using Windows
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Title Bar
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
GSF_1025_89.RAGS
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
To move a window:
|
||
1. Point to the window’s title bar.
|
||
2. Press and hold MB1.
|
||
An outline of the window appears.
|
||
3. Drag the pointer to the new location.
|
||
4. Release MB1.
|
||
If the window was partially obscured by other windows, it pops to the
|
||
top of the stack of windows and is given input focus.
|
||
To cancel a window-moving operation in progress, click another
|
||
mouse button before releasing MB1. The outline disappears, and the
|
||
window does not move.
|
||
|
||
Changing the Size of Windows
|
||
You can make windows larger, to display more information. Or you can
|
||
make windows smaller, so you can view several applications. To change a
|
||
window’s size, you use the window’s resize button.
|
||
Resize Button
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
GSF_1026_89.RAGS
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
To change the size of a window:
|
||
1. Point to the window’s resize button.
|
||
|
||
Chapter 4
|
||
Using Windows 57
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
2. Press and hold MB1.
|
||
The pointer changes into a resize cursor.
|
||
3. Drag the resize cursor until the window is the size you want.
|
||
To make the window larger, drag the resize cursor beyond the window
|
||
border and release MB1.
|
||
To make the window smaller, drag the resize cursor beyond the
|
||
window border and then back in.
|
||
4. Release MB1.
|
||
You can change the size of a window in one dimension (height or width)
|
||
or in both dimensions.
|
||
• To change the size in one dimension, drag the resize cursor across
|
||
one border of the window. As long as you cross only one border, the
|
||
outline that follows the resize cursor changes in only one dimension.
|
||
• To change the size in both dimensions, drag the resize cursor across
|
||
two adjacent borders.
|
||
• If you drag the resize cursor through two opposite borders, the first
|
||
border you crossed returns to its original location and the other border
|
||
becomes an outline that follows the resize cursor.
|
||
To cancel a window-resizing operation in progress, click another
|
||
mouse button before releasing MB1. The outline disappears, and the
|
||
window remains at its original size.
|
||
|
||
Shrinking Windows to Icons
|
||
When you start an application, its icon appears in the Icon Box. The Icon
|
||
Box is a short window that stretches across the top of the screen. While
|
||
the application is on your screen, its icon is dimmed.
|
||
If you want to run an application in the background, you can shrink its
|
||
window to an icon. The icon in the Icon Box becomes bold.
|
||
Shrinking a window frees up space on your screen to run other
|
||
applications. The application continues to run in memory and remains
|
||
easily accessible, but does not take up any room on your screen. The
|
||
application’s processes continue to execute while the application is stored
|
||
as an icon.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 4
|
||
58 Using Windows
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Shrink−to−Icon Button
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
GSF_1027_89.RAGS
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
To shrink a window to an icon:
|
||
1. Point to the window’s shrink-to-icon button.
|
||
2. Click MB1.
|
||
The window closes and its bolded icon appears in the Icon Box.
|
||
You cannot shrink the Icon Box to an icon.
|
||
When you start and stop many applications, the Icon Box may develop
|
||
gaps where icons used to be. You can rearrange the remaining icons.
|
||
To rearrange icons in the icon box:
|
||
1. Point to the icon box’s shrink-to-icon button.
|
||
2. Click MB1.
|
||
The icons are rearranged to remove gaps and overlaps.
|
||
|
||
Expanding Icons to Windows
|
||
When you expand an application’s icon, you open a window for that
|
||
application. If you already have more than one window open, the new
|
||
window is placed on top of the stack of overlapping windows. If the
|
||
window accepts text entry, the window is given input focus.
|
||
To expand an icon to a window:
|
||
1. Point to the icon in the Icon Box.
|
||
2. Click MB1.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 4
|
||
Using Windows 59
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Stacking Overlapping Windows
|
||
You do not have to move a window to see its entire contents. When
|
||
windows are overlapping, you can push the top window to the bottom
|
||
of the stack by clicking on the window’s push-to-back button. The next
|
||
window is then fully visible.
|
||
|
||
Push−to−Back Button
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
GSF_1029_89.RAGS
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
To push the top window to the bottom of a stack:
|
||
1. Point to the top window’s push-to-back button.
|
||
2. Click MB1.
|
||
If you try this repeatedly with three or more windows, you can see that
|
||
the windows cycle through the stacking order. The lower windows move
|
||
up one position in the stack each time you move the top window to the
|
||
bottom of the stack.
|
||
|
||
Choosing Items from Pull-Down Menus
|
||
The menu bar of a window lists the names of menus for that application.
|
||
When you press MB1 on a menu name, the menu is pulled down from the
|
||
menu bar.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 4
|
||
60 Using Windows
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Some pull-down menus list commands. Others list the names of items
|
||
you can work with. If a menu item is followed by three periods ( . . . ), a
|
||
dialog box will be displayed when you choose that item.
|
||
To choose an item from a pull-down menu:
|
||
1. On the menu bar, point to the menu name you want to display.
|
||
2. Press and hold MB1 to highlight the menu name and pull down the
|
||
menu.
|
||
3. While holding MB1, drag the pointer to the menu item.
|
||
4. Release MB1.
|
||
If you change your mind while looking at a pull-down menu, drag the
|
||
pointer outside the menu and release MB1. The menu disappears and no
|
||
action is taken.
|
||
|
||
Supplying Information in Dialog Boxes
|
||
Windowing applications display a dialog box when they need more
|
||
information from you to carry out a task. Dialog boxes offer various
|
||
ways to supply information. In some dialog boxes, you need to enter text.
|
||
In others, you click MB1 on a button to change a setting. Some dialog
|
||
boxes display settings you chose earlier.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 4
|
||
Using Windows 61
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Option
|
||
Button
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Text
|
||
Entry
|
||
Field
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Scale
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Push
|
||
Button
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
GSF_1035_89.RAGS
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Text entry field A vertical line text cursor shows you where the text you
|
||
type will appear. What you type appears to the left of the
|
||
text cursor. Use the < x key to delete typing mistakes. Use
|
||
the and
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
keys to move within the text.
|
||
For dialog boxes with multiple text entry fields (such as
|
||
Security), you can move between fields by:
|
||
• Clicking on each field with MB1.
|
||
• Pressing Tab to advance to the next field in the
|
||
window.
|
||
• Pressing Return to advance to the next field in the set.
|
||
|
||
Option buttons Clicking on an option button selects one option from a
|
||
group.
|
||
Toggle buttons Clicking on a square toggle button turns a setting on or off.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 4
|
||
62 Using Windows
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Scale Scales are often used to supply a numeric value. You drag
|
||
a slider in the scale. The arrow in the slider points to the
|
||
current value.
|
||
Push buttons Clicking on a rectangular push button (such as OK,
|
||
Apply, or Cancel) tells an application what to do with
|
||
the information you supplied in the dialog box.
|
||
Push buttons with The double outline indicates a default option. You can
|
||
double outlines choose a default option by simply pressing Return or by
|
||
clicking on the push button. Default options are those
|
||
you will choose most frequently. The defaults can change,
|
||
depending on the selections being made. Usually, the OK
|
||
button is the default option in a dialog box.
|
||
OK push button Records your choices and dismisses the dialog box.
|
||
Apply push button Records your choices without dismissing the dialog box.
|
||
Cancel push Dismisses the dialog box without changing any settings.
|
||
button If you made any changes without applying them, clicking
|
||
on the Cancel button prevents those changes from taking
|
||
effect.
|
||
|
||
Moving and Changing Settings in a Dialog Box
|
||
Here are the methods for moving in text entry fields and for changing text
|
||
entries, button settings, and scales in a dialog box.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
To move . . . Press . . .
|
||
|
||
Forward between text fields. Tab or Return
|
||
|
||
Backward between text fields. Shift Tab
|
||
|
||
To the next word. Shift
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
To the previous word. Shift
|
||
|
||
To the beginning of the line. F12 or Ctrl H
|
||
|
||
To the end of the line. Shift F12 or Ctrl E
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 4
|
||
Using Windows 63
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
To delete . . . Press . . .
|
||
|
||
The characters to the left of the cursor, up to and F13 or Ctrl J
|
||
including the beginning of the word.
|
||
The characters to the right of the cursor, up to Shift F13
|
||
and including the end of the word.
|
||
The character to the left of the cursor and move <x
|
||
all text to the right of the deleted character one
|
||
space to the left.
|
||
The character to the right of the cursor and move Shift <x
|
||
all text to the right of the deleted character one
|
||
space to the left.
|
||
All characters to the start of the line. Ctrl U
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
To . . . Do this . . .
|
||
|
||
Refresh the window. Press Ctrl R .
|
||
Change an option or toggle button setting. Point to the option or toggle
|
||
button and click MB1.
|
||
Change the numeric value on a scale. Drag the slider left or right
|
||
on the scale, or point to a
|
||
location on the scale and
|
||
click MB1.
|
||
|
||
|
||
Using Scroll Bars
|
||
Some windows have scroll bars that let you view text or graphics that do
|
||
not fit in the window. A scroll bar has stepping arrows at either end of
|
||
the scroll region. The slider represents your relative position in the list or
|
||
file. If the slider is at the top of the scroll region, the beginning of the list
|
||
is visible. If the slider is at the bottom of the scroll region, the end of the
|
||
list is visible.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 4
|
||
64 Using Windows
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Stepping
|
||
Arrow
|
||
|
||
Slider
|
||
Scroll
|
||
Region
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
GSF_1037_89A.RAGS
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
The size of the slider tells you how much of the list the window is
|
||
displaying. If the slider is as large as the scroll region, the complete
|
||
list is displayed. If the slider is small, only part of the list is displayed.
|
||
The smaller the slider, the larger the list. Using scroll bars: You can
|
||
scroll a line at a time, a window at a time, or to a selected point.
|
||
|
||
To scroll . . . Do this . . .
|
||
|
||
One line at a time. Click MB1 on the stepping arrow at either
|
||
end of the scroll bar.
|
||
Forward one window of text at a Point to the scroll region below the slider
|
||
time. and click MB1.
|
||
Backward one window of text at a Point to the scroll region above the slider
|
||
time. and click MB1.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 4
|
||
Using Windows 65
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
To scroll . . . Do this . . .
|
||
|
||
Continuously, one line at a time. Press and hold MB1 on the stepping arrow
|
||
at either end of the scroll bar.
|
||
Continuously, one window of text Press and hold MB1 in the scroll region.
|
||
at a time.
|
||
To another location in the list or Drag the slider to a point in the scroll
|
||
file. region that you think corresponds to the
|
||
location you want to see. For example, if
|
||
the slider is at the top of the scroll region,
|
||
you are viewing the beginning of the list
|
||
or file.
|
||
To cancel the drag, click another mouse
|
||
button before releasing MB1.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 4
|
||
5 5
|
||
Using Video Terminal (VTE) Windows
|
||
|
||
|
||
For some jobs, you may want to log in to a host system as you would on a
|
||
conventional video terminal. The VT1000 terminal lets you open a video
|
||
terminal (VTE) window. The VTE window offers the features of Digital’s
|
||
VT320 terminal with some enhancements. This chapter describes the
|
||
video terminal (VTE) window and how to use it.
|
||
When you use a VTE window, you use the keyboard to interact with the
|
||
host system. You can have several VTE windows on the screen at the
|
||
same time, running different applications in each window. You can use
|
||
your mouse to move between windows.
|
||
This chapter describes how to:
|
||
• Clear or reset the VTE window.
|
||
• Copy and paste information.
|
||
• Customize the VTE window settings
|
||
|
||
VTE Window Format
|
||
Chapters 3 and 6 describe how to start a video terminal session. The VTE
|
||
window looks like this:
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
66 Chapter 5
|
||
Using Video Terminal (VTE) Windows 67
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Title Bar
|
||
Menu Bar
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Main Text
|
||
Display Area
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Host−
|
||
Writable
|
||
Status Line
|
||
GSF_1718_89.RAGS
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
• The title bar identifies this window as a VTE window. VTE windows
|
||
are numbered in the order that you open them. The title also includes
|
||
the number of rows and columns available in the window. You can
|
||
change this setting.
|
||
• The menu bar displays the names of the three pull-down menus
|
||
available from the VTE window:
|
||
Commands Edit Customize
|
||
• The main text display area is your working area, similar to a video
|
||
terminal screen. You interact with host applications in this area.
|
||
By default, the size of this area is 24 lines by 80 columns. You can
|
||
change the size by using the Customize menu in this window.
|
||
• If enabled, the host-writable status line lets host applications
|
||
display messages to the user. A solid line separates the status
|
||
line from the main text display area. By default, the status line is
|
||
disabled.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 5
|
||
68 Using Video Terminal (VTE) Windows
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Clearing, Resetting, or Leaving the Session
|
||
The Commands menu lets you clear, reset, or quit the VTE window. You
|
||
pull down the Commands menu from the VTE window’s menu bar. The
|
||
Commands menu looks like this:
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
GSF_1313_89.RAGS
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
From the Commands menu, you can perform the following functions:
|
||
|
||
Clear Display
|
||
Choosing this item clears the contents of the current VTE window.
|
||
|
||
Clear Communications
|
||
Choosing this item performs the following actions:
|
||
• Cancels any print operation in progress.
|
||
• Cancels any escape sequence, control sequence, control string, or
|
||
character string processing in progress.
|
||
• Clears the keyboard buffer.
|
||
• Clears the receive buffer.
|
||
|
||
Reset Terminal
|
||
Choosing this item sets several terminal operating features to their
|
||
default settings.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 5
|
||
Using Video Terminal (VTE) Windows 69
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Resets . . . To . . .
|
||
|
||
Cursor mode Visible.
|
||
Insert/replace mode Replace.
|
||
Origin mode Upper left of window, independent of margins.
|
||
Autowrap mode Off.
|
||
Keyboard action mode Unlocked.
|
||
Keypad mode Numeric.
|
||
Cursor key mode Normal.
|
||
Top margin Line 1.
|
||
Bottom margin The bottom line in the window.
|
||
|
||
|
||
Quit
|
||
Choosing this item removes the VTE window, but does not end the process
|
||
on the host. This action is similar to disconnecting a serial terminal
|
||
session on a LAT DECserver. A VMS process will linger for 30 minutes by
|
||
default. (Your system manager can change that time.) During that time,
|
||
you can create another VTE window to the same host and reconnect to
|
||
the same process.
|
||
The correct way to terminate a LAT or TELNET VTE window is to log out
|
||
of the host system. When you log out, the window disappears.
|
||
On a serial line connection, you must both log out and then quit the VTE
|
||
window. If you do not log out before quitting, an unauthorized user can
|
||
create another window on your terminal and connect to your process
|
||
without a password.
|
||
|
||
Copying and Pasting Text
|
||
You can copy and paste text in a window. You can also copy and paste
|
||
text from one window to another. To copy and paste text, you use the
|
||
Edit menu. You pull down the Edit menu from the VTE window’s menu
|
||
bar. The Edit menu looks like this:
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
You can copy and paste text between VTE windows and application windows
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
that compy with the Interclient Communication Conventions Manual (ICCCM).
|
||
Chapter 5
|
||
70 Using Video Terminal (VTE) Windows
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
GSF_1311_89.RAGS
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
From the Edit menu, you can perform the following functions:
|
||
|
||
Copy
|
||
Choosing this item places the currently selected text into the terminal’s
|
||
copy buffer. You can also use the Select All menu item to select the
|
||
complete window.
|
||
|
||
Paste
|
||
Choosing this item sends the contents of the terminal’s copy buffer to the
|
||
host application as if it were typed on the keyboard.
|
||
|
||
Select All
|
||
Choosing this item places all of the window’s text into the terminal’s copy
|
||
buffer. You can also use the Copy menu item to place selected text into
|
||
the copy buffer.
|
||
|
||
Host Synchronization Required
|
||
Copying and pasting large amounts of data requires that the host system
|
||
be set to send XON/XOFF synchronization characters. This action
|
||
prevents data overruns or overflows when the contents of the paste
|
||
buffer is sent to the host.
|
||
Before you use the copy and paste features, enter one of the following
|
||
commmands:
|
||
On a VMS system
|
||
$ SET TERMINAL/HOSTSYNC
|
||
On an ULTRIX system
|
||
$ stty ixoff ixon
|
||
|
||
Chapter 5
|
||
Using Video Terminal (VTE) Windows 71
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Selecting Text to Copy
|
||
You can select text a word, a line, or a block at a time. A block can be
|
||
a single character or any number of contiguous characters, up to the
|
||
complete window. You can also use the Select All menu item in the Edit
|
||
menu to select the complete window.
|
||
To select a block of text:
|
||
1. Point to the start of the block.
|
||
2. Press and hold MB1, then drag the pointer to the end of the block.
|
||
3. Release MB1 to indicate the end of the block.
|
||
4. In the Edit menu, click on the Copy menu item.
|
||
To select a single word:
|
||
1. Point to the word.
|
||
2. Double click MB1 to select the word.
|
||
3. In the Edit menu, click on the Copy menu item.
|
||
To select a line of text:
|
||
1. Point to the line.
|
||
2. Triple click MB1 to select the line.
|
||
3. In the Edit menu, click on the Copy menu item.
|
||
To select a window:
|
||
1. Point to the window.
|
||
2. Quadruple click MB1 to select the window.
|
||
3. In the Edit menu, click on the Copy menu item.
|
||
|
||
Pasting Text
|
||
After you have selected text and stored it in the copy buffer, you can
|
||
send the text to a host system. You can paste the text into the same VTE
|
||
window, or into a different VTE window.
|
||
To paste text:
|
||
1. Place the cursor where you want to copy the text.
|
||
2. Choose the Paste menu item in the Edit menu. The terminal copies
|
||
the text to the cursor position.
|
||
|
||
Chapter 5
|
||
72 Using Video Terminal (VTE) Windows
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Using QuickCopy
|
||
QuickCopy lets you paste text without storing it in the copy buffer. There
|
||
are two ways to use QuickCopy:
|
||
Method 1:
|
||
1. Select the text as described in ‘‘Selecting Text to Copy’’.
|
||
2. Place the cursor where you want to paste the text.
|
||
3. Press and release MB3. If you accidentally move the mouse before
|
||
releasing MB3, method 2 is activated.
|
||
Method 2
|
||
1. Place the cursor where you want to paste the text.
|
||
2. Point to the start of the text you want to copy.
|
||
3. Press and hold MB3. Drag the pointer to the end of the text to be
|
||
copied. Release MB3 to copy the selected text to the cursor position.
|
||
You can use QuickCopy to copy text from one VTE window to another by
|
||
moving the input focus to another window, then clicking MB3.
|
||
|
||
Copy and Paste Functions Disabled by Some Applications
|
||
If an application running in a VTE window supports positioning of its own
|
||
pointer or cursor from the mouse, the copy and paste functions may not
|
||
work. See your application’s documentation.
|
||
One example is the VMS text processing utility (TPU). To disable mouse
|
||
input to TPU, use the following command:
|
||
TPU SET (MOUSE,OFF)
|
||
|
||
|
||
Customizing the VTE Window
|
||
You can set many features of the VTE window to your personal preference
|
||
by using the Customize menu in the VTE window’s menu bar. This
|
||
menu is similar to the Customize menu in the VT1000 Terminal Manager
|
||
window (Chapter 7). The VTE window offers functions similar to Digital’s
|
||
VT320 terminal, with some enhancements.
|
||
From the VTE’s Customize menu, you can change
|
||
• Window settings, such as the number of rows and columns displayed
|
||
• Display settings, such as the cursor style and background color
|
||
|
||
Chapter 5
|
||
Using Video Terminal (VTE) Windows 73
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
• General operating settings, such as the terminal’s operating mode and
|
||
character set selection
|
||
• Keyboard settings, such as the warning bell and the auto repeat
|
||
function for keys
|
||
• National replacement character sets (NRCs), if you use 7-bit character
|
||
sets
|
||
|
||
Applications May Customize Some Settings
|
||
Some applications that you use may also set certain window features.
|
||
Programmers can use control sequences in their applications to customize
|
||
most VTE features from the host system. The VT1000 supports most
|
||
VT320 controls (Chapter 10). This type of customization provides more
|
||
control to individual applications.
|
||
|
||
ReGIS and Sixel Graphics
|
||
VTE windows emulate the VT320 terminal, which is a text-only terminal.
|
||
However, you can use ReGIS and sixel graphics on the VT1000, through
|
||
the DECterm application under DECwindows. ReGIS is a graphics
|
||
instruction set.
|
||
Note that there will be some limitations in the appearance of applications
|
||
designed to use ReGIS, when displayed on the VT1000. The effect is
|
||
similar to displaying the same graphics in DECterm on a one-plane
|
||
workstation.
|
||
|
||
Feature Settings for New Windows
|
||
The VT1000 holds one complete set of feature settings in nonvolatile
|
||
memory. When you open a new window, the terminal uses these settings
|
||
to initialize the window.
|
||
|
||
Displaying the Customize Menu
|
||
Pull down the Customize menu from the VTE window’s menu bar. The
|
||
Customize menu looks like this:
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 5
|
||
74 Using Video Terminal (VTE) Windows
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Choosing any menu item displays a dialog box for that item. The
|
||
following sections describe each dialog box.
|
||
Each dialog box has three push buttons for recording or dismissing new
|
||
settings:
|
||
|
||
Click
|
||
on . . . To . . .
|
||
|
||
OK Record new settings and dismiss the dialog box.
|
||
Apply Record new settings without dismissing the dialog box.
|
||
Cancel Dismiss the dialog box without changing any settings. If you made
|
||
any changes without applying them, clicking on the Cancel button
|
||
cancels those changes.
|
||
|
||
|
||
Saving and Recalling Settings
|
||
If you make changes to settings, you can save them for use in all future
|
||
VTE windows. If you do not save your new settings, they are lost when
|
||
you end your current session.
|
||
If you make temporary changes to settings, you can recall the factory-
|
||
default settings or the last settings you saved.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 5
|
||
Using Video Terminal (VTE) Windows 75
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
To save or recall settings, use the following menu items from the
|
||
Customize menu:
|
||
|
||
Choose . . . To . . .
|
||
|
||
Use Last Saved Settings Recall the last VTE settings you saved.
|
||
Choose this menu item if you want to reset
|
||
any features that you changed temporarily,
|
||
but did not save.
|
||
Use System Defaults Recall the VT1000 factory-default settings for
|
||
VTE from read-only memory and from the host
|
||
system defaults, if available.
|
||
Save Current Settings Save the VTE settings you just changed, so
|
||
you can use them in all future sessions.
|
||
|
||
Some new settings do not take effect until you end your current session
|
||
and begin another one.
|
||
|
||
Changing Your VTE Window Settings
|
||
To change your VTE window settings, select the Window... menu item in
|
||
the VTE Customize menu. The Customize VTE Window dialog box looks
|
||
like this:
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 5
|
||
76 Using Video Terminal (VTE) Windows
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
You can change the following features in the Customize VTE Window
|
||
dialog box:
|
||
|
||
Auto Resize Terminal
|
||
If the size of a terminal window changes, the terminal normally adjusts
|
||
the number of display rows and columns to match the window’s size. You
|
||
can turn this feature off or on by clicking on the Auto Resize Terminal
|
||
button.
|
||
Default: off
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 5
|
||
Using Video Terminal (VTE) Windows 77
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Terminal Size
|
||
You can choose the number of rows and columns each VTE window uses.
|
||
Normally, VTE windows use 24 rows by 80 columns to display data. There
|
||
are two ways to change the number of rows and columns:
|
||
• Click on the Rows and Columns text entry fields under Terminal Size,
|
||
then enter the desired settings. You can use from 1 to 99 rows and
|
||
from 9 to 254 columns.
|
||
• Click on the desired number: 24 or 36 rows, 80 or 132 columns.
|
||
Default: 24 rows 80 columns
|
||
|
||
Big Font, Little Font
|
||
Use the Big Font setting with monitors that have 100 dot/inch screens
|
||
(such as the VR150, VR315, and VR319). Use the Little Font setting with
|
||
monitors that have a 75 dot/inch screen (such as the VR262).
|
||
To choose the Big or Little Font, click on the appropriate button.
|
||
Default: Big Font
|
||
|
||
Normal Font, Condensed Font
|
||
Normally, the terminal displays characters in a font suitable for the
|
||
display width—80 or 132 columns. You can also choose to use the normal
|
||
font or condensed font at all times, by clicking on the Normal Font
|
||
(80 Columns) button or Condensed Font (132 Characters) button. The
|
||
condensed font lets you display more characters in a small window.
|
||
Default: Normal/80, Condensed/132
|
||
|
||
Window Title
|
||
You can choose a unique title for each VTE window you open. The default
|
||
title is VTE n, where n is the number of the window. To enter a title,
|
||
click on the Window Title text entry field. The title can have up to 30
|
||
characters. If you add the # symbol, the window size (rows and columns)
|
||
also appears in the title.
|
||
Default: VTE n #
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 5
|
||
78 Using Video Terminal (VTE) Windows
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Icon Name
|
||
You can choose a unique icon name for each VTE window you use. To
|
||
enter a name, click on the Icon Name text entry field. The name can have
|
||
up to 30 characters.
|
||
If the icon name overlaps another icon, you can rearrange the icons by
|
||
clicking on the Icon Box shrink-to icon button.
|
||
Default: VTE n
|
||
|
||
Changing Your VTE Display Settings
|
||
To change your VTE display settings, select the Display... menu item in
|
||
the VTE Customize menu. The Customize VTE Display dialog box looks
|
||
like this:
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
You can change the following settings in the Customize VTE Display
|
||
dialog box:
|
||
|
||
Auto Wrap
|
||
Normally, text does not automatically wrap to the next line when the
|
||
cursor reaches the right margin in the window. Click on the Auto Wrap
|
||
toggle button to select whether or not text automatically wraps to the
|
||
next line.
|
||
|
||
Chapter 5
|
||
Using Video Terminal (VTE) Windows 79
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Default: off
|
||
|
||
Display Cursor
|
||
Normally, the text cursor appears in the VTE window as a block or
|
||
underline character. Click on the Display Cursor toggle button to select
|
||
whether or not to display a text cursor.
|
||
Default: on
|
||
|
||
Cursor Blink
|
||
Normally, the text cursor blinks. Click on the Cursor Blink toggle button
|
||
to select whether the text cursor blinks or remains steady in the VTE
|
||
window.
|
||
Default: Cursor Blink (on)
|
||
|
||
Text and Window Background
|
||
Normally, the VTE window displays dark text with a light background.
|
||
You can change the window to display light text on a dark background by
|
||
clicking on the Light Text, Dark Background button.
|
||
Default: Light Text, Dark Background
|
||
|
||
Status Display
|
||
Normally, the VTE window does not display a status line. You can choose
|
||
to display a host status line by clicking on the Host Status Display button.
|
||
The host status display is a line at the bottom of the window where the
|
||
host application can display messages.
|
||
Default: No Status Display
|
||
|
||
Cursor style
|
||
Normally, the terminal uses a solid block cursor to indicate the active
|
||
position. You can choose an underline character for the cursor by clicking
|
||
on the Underline Cursor button.
|
||
Default: Block Cursor
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 5
|
||
80 Using Video Terminal (VTE) Windows
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Changing Your VTE General Operating Features
|
||
To change general operating settings, select the General . . . menu item
|
||
from the VTE Customize menu. The Customize VTE General dialog box
|
||
appears:
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
GSF_1372_89.RAGS
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
From the Customize VTE General dialog box, you can change any of the
|
||
following settings:
|
||
|
||
Newline
|
||
This toggle button determines whether or not the Return key moves the
|
||
cursor to a new line. Normally, pressing the Return key sends a carriage
|
||
return character, but does not move the cursor to a new line. When
|
||
you click on the Newline toggle button, pressing Return sends a carriage
|
||
return and a line feed. Some non-Digital applications use the Newline
|
||
feature.
|
||
Default: off
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 5
|
||
Using Video Terminal (VTE) Windows 81
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Lock UDKs
|
||
You can choose whether or not the host system can change user-defined
|
||
key (UDK) definitions. Normally, the host can change UDK definitions.
|
||
When you click on the Lock UDKs toggle button, the host cannot change
|
||
UDK definitions.
|
||
Default: off
|
||
|
||
Lock User Features
|
||
You can choose whether or not the host system can change the settings of
|
||
certain customized features that users often set to their own preference,
|
||
including Column Mode, Display Background, and Auto Repeat.
|
||
Normally, the host can change these user features. When you click on
|
||
the Lock User Features toggle button, the host cannot change these
|
||
features.
|
||
Default: off
|
||
|
||
Local Echo
|
||
You can choose whether or not to send the data typed at the keyboard to
|
||
both the host system and the terminal. Normally, data is sent only to the
|
||
host, which can then send the data back to the terminal.
|
||
Default: off
|
||
|
||
Cursor Keys
|
||
Normally, the arrow keys send standard ANSI cursor control sequences.
|
||
Clicking on Appl Cursor Keys lets the arrow keys send application-specific
|
||
control sequences.
|
||
Default: Normal Cursor Keys
|
||
|
||
8-Bit Multinational or 7-Bit NRCS Characters
|
||
You can select the type of characters the terminal uses, 8-bit
|
||
multinational or 7-bit national replacement characters.
|
||
Normally, the terminal uses 8-bit multinational characters. This setting
|
||
supports most of today’s computing environments. There are two
|
||
multinational character sets available—the DEC Multinational character
|
||
set and the ISO Latin Alphabet No. 1 character set. Both sets consist of
|
||
the ASCII character set and their own supplemental set. To choose one
|
||
of the multinational character sets, you choose their supplemental set by
|
||
using the UPSS buttons in this dialog box.
|
||
|
||
Chapter 5
|
||
82 Using Video Terminal (VTE) Windows
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Clicking on the 7-Bit NRCS Characters button lets the terminal use one
|
||
of several national replacement character sets. This setting is useful
|
||
in computing environments that are restricted to 7 bits. NRC sets are
|
||
7-bit character sets for the major Western European languages. When
|
||
you choose this setting, the terminal uses the NRC set that matches
|
||
the current Keyboard Type chosen in the VT1000 Terminal Manager’s
|
||
Customize Keyboard dialog box (Chapter 7), by default. You can also
|
||
choose the individual NRC set by using the 7-Bit NRCS Selection menu
|
||
item from the VTE Customize menu.
|
||
Default: 8-bit Multinational Characters
|
||
|
||
Terminal ID
|
||
The VT1000 terminal sends the host system a terminal identification
|
||
(ID) message to let the host know specific operating characteristics of the
|
||
terminal. Normally, the terminal sends an ID of VT1000. You can choose
|
||
which terminal ID the VT1000 sends to the host. The terminal ID is also
|
||
called the device attributes response.
|
||
Default: VT1000 ID
|
||
|
||
Numeric Keypad
|
||
Normally, the keys on the numeric keypad send the number or
|
||
punctuation mark shown on the keys (using ASCII codes). Clicking
|
||
on the Application Keypad button lets the numeric keypad keys send
|
||
control sequences used with some applications.
|
||
Default: Numeric Keypad
|
||
|
||
User-Preferred Supplemental Set (UPSS)
|
||
If you choose the 8-Bit Multinational Characters button in this dialog
|
||
box, you can choose one of two supplemental character sets to use—DEC
|
||
Supplemental or ISO Latin 1 Supplemental. Both character sets feature
|
||
special characters used in the major European languages. The ISO Latin-
|
||
1 set includes a few more characters that are not included in the DEC
|
||
Supplemental set.
|
||
Normally, the terminal uses the UPSS ISO Latin 1 Supplemental
|
||
set. Click on the UPSS DEC Supplemental button to use the DEC
|
||
Supplemental set.
|
||
Default: UPSS ISO Latin 1
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 5
|
||
Using Video Terminal (VTE) Windows 83
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Terminal Mode
|
||
You can choose the terminal’s operating mode. The VT1000 terminal
|
||
can emulate the responses of VT52, VT100, VT200, or VT300 series text
|
||
terminals to text and control functions sent from the host system. In
|
||
either VT300 mode, the VT1000 accepts both 7 and 8-bit controls from the
|
||
host.
|
||
Normally the terminal uses VT300 7-Bit Controls. In 7-bit controls mode,
|
||
the VT1000 sends 7-bit controls and 8-bit graphic characters to the host.
|
||
Use this mode with VT300 and VT200 applications that use 7-bit control
|
||
characters.
|
||
In 8-bit controls mode, the VT1000 can send 8-bit controls and 8-bit text
|
||
characters to the host. This mode supports VT300 and VT200 8-bit text
|
||
applications.
|
||
VT100 mode lets the terminal run applications that require VT100
|
||
compatibility.
|
||
VT52 mode lets the terminal run VT52 applications.
|
||
Default: VT300 7-Bit Controls
|
||
|
||
Answerback Message
|
||
Normally, the terminal sends an answerback message to the host system
|
||
after making a connection. To enter an answerback message, click on the
|
||
Answerback Message text entry field. Your message can have up to 30
|
||
characters. )
|
||
The terminal sends this message to the host system when (1) you type Ctrl
|
||
Break , or (2) the host requests the message by sending an ENQ character.
|
||
Host requests do not affect screen data or require a user response.
|
||
|
||
Conceal Answerback Message
|
||
You can conceal your answerback message by clicking on the Conceal
|
||
Answerback Message button. When you conceal the message, you cannot
|
||
see the message in the Customize VTE General dialog box.
|
||
Default: off
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 5
|
||
84 Using Video Terminal (VTE) Windows
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Changing Your VTE Keyboard Features
|
||
To change keyboard settings used with VTE windows, choose the
|
||
Keyboard . . . menu item from the VTE Customize menu. The Customize
|
||
VTE Keyboard dialog box appears:
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
From the Customize VTE keyboard dialog box, you can change any of the
|
||
following settings:
|
||
|
||
Warning Bell
|
||
Normally, a warning bell sounds whenever the terminal receives a bell
|
||
(BEL) character from the host application. You can turn this feature off
|
||
or on by clicking on the Warning Bell toggle button.
|
||
Default: on
|
||
|
||
Margin Bell
|
||
The terminal can sound a bell when the cursor approaches the right
|
||
margin. Normally, the margin bell feature is turned off. You can turn this
|
||
feature on or off by clicking on the Margin Bell toggle button.
|
||
Default: off
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 5
|
||
Using Video Terminal (VTE) Windows 85
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Auto Repeat
|
||
Normally, most keys on the keyboard automatically repeat when you hold
|
||
them down. You can turn this feature off or on by clicking on the Auto
|
||
Repeat toggle button. The Help and Do keys never autorepeat.
|
||
The VT1000 Terminal Manager’s Customize Keyboard dialog box also has
|
||
an auto repeat feature. If that feature is disabled, the auto repeat feature
|
||
remains off regardless of the setting of the Auto Repeat button in the
|
||
Customize VTE Keyboard dialog box, or host software customized settings
|
||
(including remote session managers).
|
||
Default: on
|
||
|
||
Ctrl/Q, Ctrl/S = Hold
|
||
Normally, pressing Ctrl S prevents data from scrolling in a VTE window.
|
||
Pressing Ctrl Q allows scrolling to resume in the window.
|
||
You can turn this feature off or on by clicking on the Ctrl/Q, Ctrl/S = Hold
|
||
toggle button. If you turn the feature off, pressing Ctrl S or Ctrl Q have no
|
||
effect on scrolling.
|
||
Default: on
|
||
|
||
< x key
|
||
Normally, pressing the <x key sends a delete (DEL) character to the host
|
||
application.
|
||
When you click on the <x Backspace button, the <x key sends a
|
||
backspace (BS) character.
|
||
Default: < x Delete
|
||
|
||
,< and .> Keys Send ,, and ..
|
||
Normally, the ,< sends a < character when shifted, and the .> key sends
|
||
a > character. You can choose to have the ,< key always send a comma
|
||
and the .> key always send a period, whether the keys are shifted or
|
||
unshifted. You can turn this feature on or off by clicking on the ,< and .>
|
||
Keys Send ,, and .. toggle button. (Applies only to the North American,
|
||
British, and Dutch keyboards.)
|
||
Default: off
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 5
|
||
86 Using Video Terminal (VTE) Windows
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Tilde Key
|
||
You can choose to send an escape (ESC) character when you press the
|
||
tilde ‘ or Shift ~ keys. Normally, pressing ‘ key sends a ‘ character
|
||
to the host, and pressing Shift ~ sends a ~ character. You can turn the
|
||
ESC feature on or off by clicking on the ‘~ Key Sends ESC toggle button.
|
||
(Applies only to the North American, British, and Dutch keyboards.)
|
||
Default: off
|
||
|
||
Angle Bracket Key
|
||
You can choose to send a ‘ character when you press the < key and a ~
|
||
character when you press the (Shift) > keys. Normally, pressing < sends a
|
||
< character to the host. Pressing Shift > sends a > character. You can turn
|
||
this feature on or off by clicking on the <> Key Sends ‘~ toggle button.
|
||
(Applies only to the North American, British, and Dutch keyboards.)
|
||
Default: off
|
||
|
||
Choosing National Replacement Character Sets
|
||
You can use 8-bit multinational character sets or 7-bit national
|
||
replacement character (NRC) sets with VTE windows. You should use
|
||
the type of character set that matches your computing environment. To
|
||
choose the type of character set, use the General... menu item from the
|
||
VTE Customize menu.
|
||
When you choose to use 7-bit character sets, the terminal uses the NRC
|
||
set that matches the current Keyboard Type chosen in the VT1000
|
||
Terminal Manager’s Customize Keyboard dialog box (Chapter 7), by
|
||
default. You can also choose an NRC set from the 7-Bit NRCS Selection
|
||
menu item from the VTE Customize menu. The Customize 7-Bit NRCS
|
||
Selection dialog box looks like this:
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 5
|
||
Using Video Terminal (VTE) Windows 87
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
The scroll box lists all the NRC sets available. To choose an NRC set for
|
||
the current VTE window, click on a set in the scroll box and then click on
|
||
the OK button.
|
||
|
||
NOTE
|
||
The NRC set you select should match the Keyboard Type chosen
|
||
in the Customize Keyboard dialog box.
|
||
|
||
Printing from a Video Terminal Window
|
||
To change print settings used with VTE windows, choose the Printer . . .
|
||
menu item from the VTE Customize menu. The Customize VTE Printer
|
||
dialog box appears:
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 5
|
||
88 Using Video Terminal (VTE) Windows
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
From the Customize VTE Printer dialog box, you can change any of the
|
||
following settings:
|
||
|
||
Printer Mode
|
||
You can select from three printing modes:
|
||
• Normal
|
||
• Auto Print
|
||
• Controller
|
||
Normal Mode: Printing Text on the Screen In normal mode, your VTE
|
||
window displays text on the screen as on a typical text terminal. You can
|
||
send all or part of the text in a VTE window to the printer. To print the
|
||
screen press the F2 (Print) key.
|
||
Auto Print: Printing from the Host System In this mode, the VT1000 sends
|
||
the current display line to the printer when the cursor moves to the next
|
||
line after a line feed, form feed, vertical tab, or autowrap. Auto print
|
||
mode lets you print each line of text as it is received from the host.
|
||
To turn auto print mode on or off, press Ctrl F2 (Print). You return to
|
||
normal print mode when you leave auto print mode.
|
||
You can still perform printing functions with the F2 (Print) key in auto
|
||
print mode.
|
||
|
||
Chapter 5
|
||
Using Video Terminal (VTE) Windows 89
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Controller Mode: Letting the Host Control the Printer In this mode, the host
|
||
system can send text directly to the printer, without displaying the text
|
||
on the terminal’s screen. You cannot select this mode from the keyboard.
|
||
Applications select this mode by using VT320 programming functions.
|
||
If you click on the 2-Way Printer Port button in the Customize Printer
|
||
Port dialog box (Chapter 7), you can also display the text on the screen.
|
||
The terminal sends characters received at the printer port back to the
|
||
host.
|
||
The F2 (Print) key does not work in printer controller mode.
|
||
Default: Normal
|
||
|
||
Print Extent Mode
|
||
Normally, the VT1000 sends only the text within the scrolling margins
|
||
to the printer port. If you want to send the complete screen, click on the
|
||
Entire Page button.
|
||
Default: Scroll Area
|
||
|
||
Print FF Mode
|
||
Normally, the VT1000 terminal does not send a form feed (FF) character
|
||
to the printer port at the end of a print screen operation. If you want to
|
||
send a form feed, click on the Form Feed button.
|
||
Default: No Form Feed
|
||
|
||
Printed Data Type
|
||
This feature lets you choose character sets to match the capabilities
|
||
of your printer. The ‘‘National’’ settings refer to the 7-bit national
|
||
replacement character (NRC) sets, including the default North American
|
||
(ASCII) set. See ‘‘Choosing National Replacement Character Sets’’.
|
||
Default: National Only
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 5
|
||
90 Using Video Terminal (VTE) Windows
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Click on this button . . . For printers that support . . .
|
||
|
||
National Only Only the national replacement character sets.
|
||
Examples: LA34, LA36, and LA120 printers.
|
||
National + Line Drawing The national replacement character sets and and
|
||
the VT100 line drawing set. Example: LA100
|
||
printer.
|
||
All Characters The multinational and line drawing sets.
|
||
Examples: LA50 and LA75 Companion printers.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 5
|
||
6
|
||
6
|
||
Using the VT1000 Terminal Manager
|
||
|
||
|
||
The VT1000 Terminal Manager window appears on the screen at the start
|
||
of every session. This window acts as a control panel for your current
|
||
session. The VT1000 Terminal Manager window lets you:
|
||
• Create or end a session with a host.
|
||
• Print the contents of the screen.
|
||
• Customize the terminal’s operating features (Chapter 7).
|
||
|
||
VT1000 Terminal Manager Window
|
||
When you turn on the terminal, the VT1000 Terminal Manager Window
|
||
appears in the middle of the screen. An Icon Box appears at the top of
|
||
the screen, and a diagnostic messages box appears at the bottom of the
|
||
screen.
|
||
The VT1000 Terminal Manager window looks like this:
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 6 91
|
||
92 Using the VT1000 Terminal Manager
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
• The title bar at the top of the window displays:
|
||
|
||
|
||
Shrink-to-icon button To shrink a window to an icon.
|
||
VT1000 Vn.n Terminal Manager Indicates firmware version.
|
||
Push-to-back button To move a window to the bottom
|
||
of a stack.
|
||
Resize button To change the window size.
|
||
• The menu bar displays the names of menus available:
|
||
Session To pause during or end a session.
|
||
Create To create a session.
|
||
Customize To customize terminal features.
|
||
Print Screen To print all or part of the screen.
|
||
• The Messages region displays VT1000 diagnostic or operating status
|
||
messages.
|
||
• The VT1000 Address region shows the terminal’s Ethernet, IP, and
|
||
LAT addresses. These addresses define the terminal’s location on a
|
||
network, whether your are using TCP/IP or LAT.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 6
|
||
Using the VT1000 Terminal Manager 93
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
• The Memory Remaining, Kilobytes region shows a scale indicating
|
||
how many kilobytes of RAM memory remain available for use. The
|
||
right end of the scale shows the total number of megabytes your
|
||
system has: 1M, 2M, 3M, or 4M.
|
||
When you run applications or create windows that require large
|
||
amounts of memory, you should monitor the memory remaining
|
||
scale. The amount of memory being used changes all the time. If the
|
||
terminal runs out of memory, it may stop functioning and you may
|
||
lose work not yet saved. If the terminal runs out of memory, turn the
|
||
system box off and on to recover. You can add up to 4 megabytes
|
||
of optional memory to the VT1000, in 1-megabyte increments
|
||
(Chapter 2).
|
||
• The Secure Reset Count: increases by 1 every time a secure reset
|
||
occurs. A secure reset erases the terminal’s nonvolatile memory
|
||
(except the secure reset count) and resets the terminal’s operating
|
||
features to their factory-default settings. A secure reset also overrides
|
||
saved passwords. To learn how to perform a secure reset, contact
|
||
Digital Customer Services.
|
||
|
||
Creating Sessions on a Host System
|
||
The VT1000 terminal lets you create sessions on VMS, ULTRIX, or UNIX
|
||
host systems. A session is an active connection between the terminal and
|
||
the host system. You can open video terminal window (VTE) or X window
|
||
sessions on any of these systems.
|
||
Video terminal (VTE) sessions let you log in to a host as you would with
|
||
a conventional video terminal. The VTE window is compatible with many
|
||
of Digital’s video terminals.
|
||
X window sessions let you use X window or DECwindow applications
|
||
running on your host system.
|
||
To create sessions to your host system, you use the Create menu in the
|
||
VT1000 Terminal Manager window.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 6
|
||
94 Using the VT1000 Terminal Manager
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
GSF_1018_89.RAGS
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
The following sections describe how to use the Create menu to create
|
||
sessions on host systems.
|
||
|
||
Choose this menu
|
||
item . . . To create . . . On this system . . .
|
||
|
||
LAT Terminal Window . . . Video terminal VMS or ULTRIX
|
||
window
|
||
TELNET Terminal Video terminal ULTRIX or UNIX
|
||
Window . . . window
|
||
Terminal Window on Host Video terminal VMS, ULTRIX, or UNIX
|
||
Port window on the
|
||
serial host port
|
||
Terminal Window on Printer Video terminal VMS, ULTRIX, or UNIX
|
||
Port window on the
|
||
serial printer port
|
||
LAT X Session . . . X window VMS
|
||
|
||
|
||
Notes on Creating Windows
|
||
• You can create multiple LAT and TELNET video terminal windows.
|
||
• On an ULTRIX system, you need UWS Version 2.2 or higher to use
|
||
the LAT Terminal Window feature. The system manager must enable
|
||
support. ULTRIX LAT supports video terminal (VTE) windows only
|
||
(service class 1). X windows require service class 3.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 6
|
||
Using the VT1000 Terminal Manager 95
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
• You can only open one terminal window for each serial port (host port
|
||
or printer port). If the host port or printer port is in use, that menu
|
||
item is dimmed and not selectable. You can select whether the printer
|
||
port acts as a printer port or an alternate host port in the Customize
|
||
Printer Port dialog box. The Customize Printer Port dialog box is
|
||
described in Chapter 7.
|
||
|
||
Creating a Video Terminal Window on a VMS System
|
||
To create a video terminal window, you choose the LAT Terminal
|
||
Window . . . menu item from the Create menu. The LAT Terminal
|
||
Window Service Select dialog box appears. This dialog box provides
|
||
access to hosts or services on a local area network that supports the local
|
||
area transport (LAT) protocol. You use this dialog box mainly with the
|
||
VMS operating system.
|
||
The dialog box lists all available hosts and services. You can assign
|
||
preferred services that you use frequently. After you select a host, a new
|
||
video terminal window appears. This window lets you access your host
|
||
through the keyboard as on a conventional video terminal.
|
||
The LAT Terminal Window Service Select dialog box looks like this:
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 6
|
||
96 Using the VT1000 Terminal Manager
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
To use this dialog box, you must first enter one or more group codes into
|
||
the Customize LAT dialog box. If you have not entered any group codes in
|
||
the Customize LAT dialog box, click on the Cancel push button to dismiss
|
||
the LAT Terminal Window Service Select dialog box. The Customize LAT
|
||
dialog box is described in Chapter 7.
|
||
To start a session on a host:
|
||
There are three ways to start a session.
|
||
• Method 1
|
||
1. Use the keyboard to enter your service name into the Service
|
||
Node Port text entry field.
|
||
2. Click on the Add button to add the service name to the Preferred
|
||
Services scroll box.
|
||
3. Click on the Connect button.
|
||
|
||
Chapter 6
|
||
Using the VT1000 Terminal Manager 97
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
• Method 2
|
||
Double click on your service name, either in the top scroll box (which
|
||
lists known services) or the Preferred Services scroll box.
|
||
• Method 3
|
||
1. Click on a service name in the known services scroll box or the
|
||
Preferred Services scroll box. The name appears in the Service
|
||
Node Port text entry field under the Preferred Services scroll box.
|
||
2. Click on the Connect button or press the Return key.
|
||
|
||
Service, Node, and Port
|
||
The text entry field for Service, Node, and Port allows you to specify the
|
||
connection you want in detail. Usually, you only need to enter the service
|
||
name as listed in the known services scroll box.
|
||
Service Your terminal is connected to a local area network served by the
|
||
Ethernet local area transport (LAT). Computing resources on the LAT use
|
||
service names to announce themselves to the LAT. A computing resource
|
||
can have any name, which the system manager assigns. Several resources
|
||
can have the same name. Each resource can have many names.
|
||
When you request a connection to a service, the terminal checks the
|
||
information sent by each resource with that name and connects to the
|
||
least loaded resource. By convention, the service names include at least
|
||
the DECnet node and cluster names.
|
||
The VT1000 can keep track of 64 known services at one time. The
|
||
terminal displays them in the following places:
|
||
• LAT Terminal Window Service Select dialog box
|
||
– 53 in the Service list
|
||
– 4 in the Preferred Services list
|
||
– 1 in the Service/Node/Port text entry field
|
||
• LAT X Session Service Select dialog box
|
||
– 53 in the Service list (a subset of the Service list in the LAT
|
||
Terminal Window Service Select dialog box)
|
||
– 4 in the Preferred Services list
|
||
– 1 in the Service/Node/Port text entry field
|
||
• Customize Font Path dialog box
|
||
– 1 from either the LAT or TFTP Font Path text entry field
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 6
|
||
98 Using the VT1000 Terminal Manager
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Node A node is an individual computer system on a local area network.
|
||
A node may have various names, but generally the only names sepecific to
|
||
that node are its DECnet node name and any other unique service name
|
||
assigned by the LAT manager. You can request connection to a particular
|
||
node if needed. For example, you may need to access a specific hardware
|
||
resource like a communications port that is only accessible on that CPU.
|
||
Port A port is a communications connection on a CPU. An example is a
|
||
serial line connected to a modem. You may need to get permission from
|
||
the system manager to access a port from the network.
|
||
|
||
Update Known Services
|
||
When you click on the Update Known Services button, the scroll box to
|
||
the left of the button updates the list of services available on the LAT.
|
||
If your service is not on the list, and you entered its group code in the
|
||
Customize LAT dialog box, your service may have taken too long to
|
||
broadcast its multicast message to the terminal. Other services with
|
||
corresponding group codes may have filled the list first. If this occurs,
|
||
remove unneeded group codes from the Customize LAT dialog box or add
|
||
your service to the Preferred Services scroll box.
|
||
Your group code setting in the Customize LAT... dialog box must
|
||
correspond to your node. See your system manager for group codes.
|
||
To view the list of nodes:
|
||
You can view a list of all nodes (as opposed to services) accessible on the
|
||
LAT. Press Shift and click on the Update Known Services button.
|
||
|
||
Preferred Services
|
||
The Preferred Services scroll box lets you enter up to four frequently used
|
||
host systems or services. Preferred services override other known services
|
||
in the service list, and ensure that your regular services will remain
|
||
known to the terminal. You can also enter an optional nodename and port
|
||
number. This feature lets you specify a particular node within a service,
|
||
and a particular port on a server device.
|
||
You can also use the other buttons in the dialog box to add or remove
|
||
selections.
|
||
To add a new service from the known services scroll box to the
|
||
Preferred Services scroll box:
|
||
1. Click on a service name from the known services scroll box.
|
||
2. Click on the Add button.
|
||
|
||
Chapter 6
|
||
Using the VT1000 Terminal Manager 99
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
There must be an empty space in the Preferred Services scroll box before
|
||
you can add a new host or service name to the box. Use the Remove
|
||
button to delete an old host or service name from the box.
|
||
To remove a service from the Preferred Services scroll box:
|
||
1. Click on the service you want to remove.
|
||
2. Click on the Remove button.
|
||
To save the current entries in the Preferred Services scroll box:
|
||
Click on the Save button. This saves the list in the terminal’s nonvolatile
|
||
memory. You must perform this step to save any changes you make to the
|
||
list.
|
||
To edit the Preferred Services scroll box:
|
||
You can edit entries in the box directly using the mouse and keyboard.
|
||
1. Click on the Service Node Port text entry field . A text curor appears.
|
||
2. From the keyboard, type in a new service name. Use the <x key if
|
||
you make a mistake.
|
||
An entry can be a service name only, a service name and a nodename,
|
||
or a service name, nodename, and port number. For example, any of
|
||
the following entries are valid:
|
||
|
||
BETA
|
||
BETA_CLUSTER BETA1
|
||
BETA_CLUSTER BETA1 07
|
||
3. Click on the Add button. The new service entry appears in the
|
||
Preferred Services scroll box.
|
||
To cancel a selection you have made:
|
||
Click on the Cancel button.
|
||
To view all accessible services in the known services scroll box:
|
||
Click on the Update Known Services button.
|
||
You may have to click on this button several times before the service
|
||
you want appears. Sometimes it takes a few minutes for the terminal to
|
||
establish communication with some services on the network.
|
||
To view all accessible nodes in the known services scroll box:
|
||
Press Shift and click on the Update Known Services button.
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 6
|
||
100 Using the VT1000 Terminal Manager
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
To display more technical data about a host or service:
|
||
1. Click on one of the services in the known services scroll box or in the
|
||
Preferred Services scroll box.
|
||
2. Click on the Show More Data button. All the data known about the
|
||
selected host or service appears in the known services scroll box.
|
||
|
||
Creating an X Window Session on a VMS System
|
||
To create an X window session, you choose the LAT X Session . . . menu
|
||
item. The LAT X Session Service Select dialog box appears. The dialog
|
||
box lets you start an X window or DECwindows session on a VMS host
|
||
with X window software installed. After you select a host, the VT1000
|
||
begins a windowing session on that host.
|
||
This dialog box works the same as the LAT Terminal Window Service
|
||
Select dialog box. For a description of how to use the LAT X Session
|
||
Service Select dialog box, see ‘‘Creating a Video Terminal Window on a
|
||
VMS System’’ in this chapter.
|
||
|
||
Known Services Scroll Box May Not List Some X Services
|
||
There are two things to remember when looking at the list of known
|
||
services in the LAT X Session Service Select dialog box:
|
||
• The list may not include all the services listed in the LAT Terminal
|
||
Window dialog box. Only those services that support the X protocol
|
||
over the LAT (LAT class 3) are included.
|
||
• If your service is not on the list, and you entered its group code in the
|
||
Customize LAT dialog box, your service may have taken too long to
|
||
broadcast its multicast message to the VT1000. Other services with
|
||
corresponding group codes may have filled the list first. If this occurs,
|
||
remove unneeded group codes from the Customize LAT dialog box.
|
||
|
||
Working with Multiple Remote Session Managers
|
||
Each session manager you run on a remote host thinks it has complete
|
||
control of your terminal. To maintain a consistent user interface when
|
||
using multiple remote session managers, you must consider two issues—
|
||
the terminal’s feature settings and the Quit feature.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 6
|
||
Using the VT1000 Terminal Manager 101
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Feature Settings When you start up session manager, it changes any
|
||
settable characteristics of your terminal, such as screen background and
|
||
keyboard selection. If you run multiple session managers, each one sets
|
||
up the terminal according to the terminal’s saved characteristics at the
|
||
time the session manager starts up. To keep the characteristics from
|
||
changing unexpectedly, be sure to change and save all your preferences in
|
||
all of your session managers.
|
||
Quit Choosing the Quit option from any session manager will end all
|
||
activity on the terminal. A Quit command is not a logout for that session
|
||
only. Many session managers send an X protocol command to the terminal
|
||
that stops everything and resets the terminal to its initial state. There is
|
||
no way to log out from only one X session manager. Logging out of one
|
||
session logs you out of all.
|
||
|
||
NOTE
|
||
VTE windows are disconnected, rather than logged out.
|
||
|
||
Multiple Connection Messages at Start of X Session
|
||
If connection request messages are enabled in the Customize Terminal
|
||
Manager dialog box, you will see multiple connection and termination
|
||
messages at the start of an X session. This is normal. See ‘‘Controlling
|
||
the Display of Messages’’ in Chapter 7.
|
||
|
||
Monitoring Memory Usage
|
||
When you run applications or create windows that require large amounts
|
||
of memory, you should monitor the Memory Remaining scale in the
|
||
Terminal Manager window. If the terminal runs out of memory, the
|
||
terminal may stop functioning. See ‘‘VT1000 Terminal Manager Window’’
|
||
in this chapter.
|
||
|
||
Canceling an Unwanted X Window Login Box
|
||
To cancel an X window login box, pull down the VT1000 Terminal
|
||
Manager’s Session menu and click on Quit. This action closes all
|
||
connections and restarts the terminal.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 6
|
||
102 Using the VT1000 Terminal Manager
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Creating a Video Terminal Window or X Window Session on
|
||
an ULTRIX or UNIX System
|
||
To create a video terminal window or X window session, you use the
|
||
TELNET Terminal Window . . . menu item. When you select this item,
|
||
the TELNET Terminal Window Host Select dialog box appears.
|
||
This dialog box provides access to hosts on a wide area network that
|
||
supports the transmission control program/Internet protocol (TCP/IP). You
|
||
use this dialog box mainly with the UNIX or ULTRIX operating system.
|
||
The TELNET Terminal Window Host Select dialog box looks like this:
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
IP Address and optional host name
|
||
In the TCP/IP communication protocol, the terminal uses an IP address
|
||
or host name to access a specific host computer on the network. You use
|
||
the IP Address and optional host name list to enter IP addresses and
|
||
optional host names. TCP/IP addresses and host names are limited to 30
|
||
characters. You can save up to four addresses in nonvolatile memory.
|
||
To enter a host:
|
||
1. Click on a button to activate the text entry field.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 6
|
||
Using the VT1000 Terminal Manager 103
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
2. Use your keyboard to enter an IP address and optional host name.
|
||
Use the < x key if you make a mistake.
|
||
There are three ways you can enter a host’s IP address and host
|
||
name. If you have Name Service available on your network, you can
|
||
simply enter the host name in place of the host’s IP address. See your
|
||
system manager.
|
||
|
||
123.45.67.89
|
||
123.45.67.89 HOST_NAME
|
||
HOST_NAME (Requires Name Service.)
|
||
You can enter a host IP address in one of the following formats:
|
||
Format Example
|
||
Decimal dot notation 123.45.67.89
|
||
Decimal whole number 2066563929
|
||
Hexadecimal 0x762d4359
|
||
Hexadecimal dot notation 0x76.2d.43.59
|
||
Octal dot notation 0173.55.103.131
|
||
Octal whole number 017313241531
|
||
For TELNET communications, you can append a TELNET port number
|
||
preceded by a comma. For example, if you appended port number 23 to
|
||
the decimal dot address above, the address would be 123.45.67.89,23. You
|
||
may only specify nonprivileged port numbers (with the exception of the
|
||
TELNET port).
|
||
To connect to a host:
|
||
1. Click on the button next to the IP address or host name you want to
|
||
connect to.
|
||
2. Click on the Connect button or press the Return key.
|
||
To remove a host from the list:
|
||
1. Click on the button next to the IP address/host name you want to
|
||
remove.
|
||
2. Click on the Remove button.
|
||
To save the current list of hosts:
|
||
Click on the Save button to save the list in nonvolatile memory. You must
|
||
perform this step to save any changes you made to the list.
|
||
To cancel a selection you have made:
|
||
Click on the Cancel button.
|
||
|
||
Chapter 6
|
||
104 Using the VT1000 Terminal Manager
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
TELNET ANSI Support
|
||
When you open a TELNET VTE window on a host system running
|
||
ULTRIX Version 3.1 (UWS Version 2.1) or earlier (or an old version of
|
||
TELNET), the host cannot determine the VT1000’s terminal type. Early
|
||
versions of TELNET do not support terminal type suboption negotiation.
|
||
One symptom is that the vi screen editor enters open mode.
|
||
Define the TERM environmental variable to VT300, connecting to your
|
||
host with one of the following commands:
|
||
C-shell
|
||
% setenv TERM vt300
|
||
Bourne shell
|
||
$ set TERM=vt300
|
||
$ export TERM
|
||
|
||
Creating a Video Terminal Window on the Host or Printer
|
||
Port (VMS, ULTRIX, or UNIX)
|
||
To create a video terminal window on the host port or video port, you
|
||
choose one of the following menu items:
|
||
|
||
Terminal Window on Host Port
|
||
Lets you connect to a host through the host serial communication port.
|
||
This port uses a 6-pin, DEC-423 connector on the rear of the system box.
|
||
|
||
Terminal Window on Printer Port
|
||
Lets you connect to a host through the printer port. This port uses the
|
||
6-pin, DEC-423 serial printer connector on the rear of the system box.
|
||
Before you can open a terminal window on the printer port, you must
|
||
set the printer port to work as a host port. See the Customize Printer
|
||
Port dialog box section in Chapter 7. If you do not set the printer port to
|
||
work as a host port, the Terminal Window on Printer Port menu item is
|
||
dimmed and not selectable.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 6
|
||
Using the VT1000 Terminal Manager 105
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Creating a TCP/IP X Window Session
|
||
There is no menu selection to create a TCP/IP X window session, because
|
||
there is no standard protocol for automatically starting an X window
|
||
session manager from the terminal under TCP/IP.
|
||
To begin a TCP/IP X window session:
|
||
1. Log into the system by selecting the TELNET Terminal Window . . .
|
||
menu item from the Create menu.
|
||
2. Start your applications with their output directed to your terminal.
|
||
C-shell
|
||
% setenv DISPLAY your_terminal’s_IP_address:0
|
||
Bourne or Korn shell
|
||
$ DISPLAY=your_terminal’s_IP_address:0
|
||
$ export DISPLAY
|
||
3. Start your client application.
|
||
C-shell
|
||
% dxterm
|
||
Bourne or Korn shell
|
||
$ dxterm
|
||
To work on a VT1000 as you would on a workstation:
|
||
1. Pull down the Customize menu from the VT1000 Terminal Manager
|
||
menu bar.
|
||
2. Choose the Customize Window . . . dialog box.
|
||
3. Click on the Allow Remote Window Manager button.
|
||
4. For UWS Version 2.1, you must specify the display address in the
|
||
command to start the X window session application:
|
||
Bourne or Korn shell
|
||
% dxsession -d your_terminal’s_IP_address:0
|
||
C-shell
|
||
$ dxsession -d your_terminal’s_IP_address:0
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 6
|
||
106 Using the VT1000 Terminal Manager
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
For UWS Version 2.2, the X window session application gets its
|
||
address from the DISPLAY definition:
|
||
C-shell
|
||
% dxsession
|
||
Bourne or Korn shell
|
||
$ dxsession
|
||
|
||
|
||
Pausing or Ending Sessions
|
||
The terminal manager’s Session menu lets you pause during a session or
|
||
quit a session.
|
||
|
||
Pausing a Session
|
||
You can pause a session at any time. When you pause a session, the
|
||
terminal covers the entire screen with the Enter password to resume
|
||
prompt.
|
||
Restrictions
|
||
• For ULTRIX systems, UWS Version 2.1 does not support the pause
|
||
function for remote sessions.
|
||
• Due to the system disconnect behavior on serial lines, do not use
|
||
Pause with sessions connected through the serial host port or printer
|
||
port.
|
||
To pause your session:
|
||
1. Pull down the Session menu from the VT1000 Terminal Manager’s
|
||
menu bar.
|
||
2. Click on the Pause menu item. The Pause Password dialog box
|
||
appears.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 6
|
||
Using the VT1000 Terminal Manager 107
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
3. You can either enter a new password or use the previous password.
|
||
To enter a new password:
|
||
• Enter the new password (up to 127 characters) into the Enter
|
||
Password text field.
|
||
• Click on the Verify Password text field and enter the same
|
||
password into the Verify Password text field. If you make a
|
||
mistake, click on the Clear button to start over.
|
||
Click on the Save pushbutton if you wish to save the password for
|
||
future sessions.
|
||
• Click on the OK button to save the password and exit the dialog
|
||
box.
|
||
If you have already entered a password:
|
||
You can pause the session by clicking on the Use Previous Password
|
||
button.
|
||
When you click on the OK or Use Previous Password pushbuttons, the
|
||
terminal enters the pause state and the Enter Password to resume prompt
|
||
appears.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 6
|
||
108 Using the VT1000 Terminal Manager
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
To exit the pause state and resume session activity:
|
||
Enter your password and click on the OK button.
|
||
If you forget the password, you can click on the Quit button to end all
|
||
sessions.
|
||
If you select . . . The terminal . . .
|
||
OK Verifies that your password is correct.
|
||
|
||
Clear Clears the password field.
|
||
|
||
Quit Ends all sessions on the terminal
|
||
(like Quit in the Session menu).
|
||
|
||
Ending a Session
|
||
When you use the Quit menu item in the Session menu to end a session,
|
||
the terminal manager disconnects all sessions (local and remote) and
|
||
restarts the terminal, including setting the font path again. The Quit
|
||
function in the remote session manager of any VMS X window session
|
||
performs the same action. You should plan to end the session as the last
|
||
activity of that work period.
|
||
When you end a session, the VT1000:
|
||
• Ends all sessions.
|
||
• Clears the screen of all windows.
|
||
• Performs a complete software reset.
|
||
• Recovers all memory.
|
||
|
||
Chapter 6
|
||
Using the VT1000 Terminal Manager 109
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
• Displays the VT1000 Terminal Manager.
|
||
• Attempts to set a font path.
|
||
To end your session:
|
||
1. Pull down the Session menu from the VT1000 Terminal Manager’s
|
||
menu bar.
|
||
2. Click on the Quit menu item. A prompt box appears that asks you if
|
||
you really want to end the session.
|
||
• To end the session, click on Yes.
|
||
• To remain in the session, click on No.
|
||
If you made changes in the Customize menu and have not saved the
|
||
changes, another prompt box appears, asking if you would like to save
|
||
them.
|
||
If you select . . . The terminal . . .
|
||
Yes Saves the current settings before performing
|
||
a restart operation.
|
||
|
||
No Immediately quits the session without
|
||
saving your changes.
|
||
|
||
Cancel Does not quit the session. You can resume
|
||
working in that session.
|
||
|
||
Quitting From a Remote Session Manager
|
||
When quitting from a remote session manager, a prompt box may appear
|
||
asking if you want to save customization changes before quitting. This
|
||
question refers to customization changes made to the remote session
|
||
manager settings only.
|
||
Quitting from a remote session manager does not save VT1000 Terminal
|
||
Manager settings. To save customization changes made to the VT1000
|
||
Terminal Manager during the session, select Save Current Settings in the
|
||
Terminal Manager Customize menu.
|
||
Quitting from the remote session manager (dxsession) on an ULTRIX
|
||
system over TCP/IP:
|
||
• Terminates dxsession and dxwm.
|
||
• Does not terminate all applications (clients) started under that
|
||
manager.
|
||
|
||
Chapter 6
|
||
110 Using the VT1000 Terminal Manager
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
• Does not reset the terminal.
|
||
|
||
Customizing Your VT1000 Environment
|
||
The Customize menu in the VT1000 Terminal Manager window lets you
|
||
check and control the settings for many features—from the keyboard to
|
||
host communications. Chapter 7 describes the VT1000 Customize menu.
|
||
|
||
Printing the Screen
|
||
The Print Screen menu in the VT1000 Terminal Manager window lets you
|
||
print all or part of the screen display, using a local printer connected to
|
||
the rear of the terminal.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
GSF_1044_89.RAGS
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
If you are currently using the printer port as a second host port, the print
|
||
screen selections in the menu are dimmed and not available.
|
||
The VT1000 terminal encodes the screen image into units called sixels,
|
||
then sends the encoded image to the local printer. A sixel is a vertical
|
||
column of six pixels. Pixels, or picture elements, are the smallest
|
||
displayable unit on a video screen.
|
||
The VT1000 supports level 1 and level 2 Digital printers. Level 1 printers
|
||
include the LA50 dot matrix printer. Level 2 printers include the LA75
|
||
dot matrix printer and the LN03 laser printer.
|
||
|
||
Chapter 6
|
||
Using the VT1000 Terminal Manager 111
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
To print the complete screen image:
|
||
Choose the Local Print Entire Screen menu item.
|
||
To print a portion of the screen image:
|
||
1. Choose the Local Print Portion of Screen menu item. The pointer
|
||
turns into a cross.
|
||
2. Hold down MB1, then drag the pointer across the portion of the screen
|
||
you want to print. As you drag the pointer, a rectangle forms around
|
||
the portion of the screen.
|
||
3. Release MB1 to send the image to the printer.
|
||
|
||
Printer Status
|
||
Printer status messages appear in the Messages region of the VT1000
|
||
Terminal Manager window.
|
||
• A Printer Offline message appears if a print request is made but the
|
||
DTR signal from the printer is not asserted within 2 seconds. This
|
||
message occurs if the printer is turned off or not connected.
|
||
• A Printer Busy message appears if a print request comes in while the
|
||
printer is printing another job.
|
||
In both cases, the print request is canceled.
|
||
|
||
Canceling a Print Screen Operation
|
||
During large printing jobs, a Print Cancel dialog box appears on the
|
||
screen to let you cancel the print operation. Click on the Okay button to
|
||
cancel the print operation. Printing stops when the printer empties its
|
||
input buffer. The Print Cancel dialog box is not printed.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 6
|
||
7 7
|
||
Customizing the VT1000 Terminal
|
||
Manager
|
||
|
||
|
||
The Customize menu in the VT1000 Terminal Manager window lets you
|
||
check and control the settings for many features—from the keyboard to
|
||
host communications. Initially, the features use factory-default settings
|
||
that work with many host systems. You can make temporary changes for
|
||
the current session, or you can save the settings for all future sessions.
|
||
To access the terminal’s operating features, you use the Customize
|
||
menu in the VT1000 Terminal Manager window. You can look at the
|
||
current settings of features, change them, and save the new settings. The
|
||
following sections describe the Customize menu items.
|
||
There are three other ways to customize certain features of your terminal:
|
||
• VTE Customize menu
|
||
When you open a video terminal window, you can choose another
|
||
Customize menu. This menu lets you change certain video terminal
|
||
window features while an application is running. Most of the time,
|
||
the application handles customization of the video terminal window.
|
||
Chapter 5 describes how to use the video terminal (VTE) window.
|
||
• Host-based control functions
|
||
Applications can control many terminal features from the host by
|
||
using control functions. Chapter 10 is a summary of VT1000 specific
|
||
control functions that control the video terminal window.
|
||
• Client Customize
|
||
The X window or DECwindows software package includes its own
|
||
Customize utility, not described here. For more information on the
|
||
DECwindows Customize utility, see the VMS DECwindows User’s
|
||
Guide.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
112 Chapter 7
|
||
Customizing the VT1000 Terminal Manager 113
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Displaying the Customize Menu
|
||
You pull down the Customize menu from the VT1000 Terminal Manager’s
|
||
menu bar. The Customize menu looks like this:
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
GSF_1708_89.RAGS
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
When you choose a menu item from the menu, the dialog box for that item
|
||
appears. Shaded buttons indicate the current settings. You can examine
|
||
the settings and change them if necessary. After you make changes in a
|
||
dialog box, you can record your settings or dismiss the dialog box.
|
||
When you record your settings, the new settings take effect for that
|
||
session only. To use the new settings for all future sessions, you must
|
||
save the settings in nonvolatile memory. See ‘‘Saving and Recalling
|
||
Settings’’ in this chapter.
|
||
Each dialog box has three push buttons for recording or dismissing new
|
||
settings:
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 7
|
||
114 Customizing the VT1000 Terminal Manager
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Click on . . . To . . .
|
||
|
||
OK Record new settings and dismiss the dialog box.
|
||
Apply Record new settings without dismissing the dialog box.
|
||
Cancel Dismiss the dialog box without changing any settings. If you
|
||
made any changes without applying them, clicking on the
|
||
Cancel button cancels those changes.
|
||
|
||
|
||
Saving and Recalling Settings
|
||
If you make changes to settings, you can save them for use in all future
|
||
sessions. If you do not save your new settings, they are lost when you end
|
||
your current session.
|
||
If you make temporary changes to settings, you can recall the factory-
|
||
default settings or the last settings you saved.
|
||
To save or recall settings, use the following menu items from the
|
||
Customize menu:
|
||
|
||
Choose . . . To . . .
|
||
|
||
Use Last Saved Settings Recall the last settings you saved. Choose
|
||
this menu item if you want to reset any
|
||
features that you changed temporarily, but
|
||
did not save.
|
||
Use System Defaults Recall the VT1000 factory-default settings
|
||
for the VT1000 Terminal Manager from
|
||
read-only memory.
|
||
Save Current Settings Save the VT1000 Terminal Manager
|
||
settings you just changed, so you can use
|
||
them in all future sessions.
|
||
|
||
Some new settings do not take effect until you end your current session
|
||
and begin another one.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 7
|
||
Customizing the VT1000 Terminal Manager 115
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Changing Your Keyboard Settings
|
||
To change your keyboard settings, choose the Keyboard . . . menu item
|
||
from the Customize menu. The Customize Keyboard dialog box appears:
|
||
|
||
NOTE
|
||
You can also customize some keyboard settings for individual VTE
|
||
windows. See Chapter 5.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
GSF_1046_89.RAGS
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
From the Customize Keyboard dialog box, you can change any of the
|
||
following settings:
|
||
|
||
Bell Volume
|
||
A warning bell sounds to alert you to system messages. You can adjust
|
||
the bell volume by dragging the arrow in the Percent Volume slider to the
|
||
right or left. You can also adjust the bell volume by moving the pointer to
|
||
a location on the slider and clicking MB1. To disable the bell, click on the
|
||
Disable button.
|
||
Default: Enable
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 7
|
||
116 Customizing the VT1000 Terminal Manager
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Keyclick Volume
|
||
Each time you press a keyboard key, the keyboard makes a clicking sound.
|
||
You can adjust the keyclick volume by dragging the arrow in the Percent
|
||
Volume slider right or left. You can also adjust the keyclick volume by
|
||
moving the pointer to a location on the slider and clicking MB1. To
|
||
disable keyclicks, click on the Disable button.
|
||
When you use VTE windows, some keys click or autorepeat differently
|
||
than they would when using a DECterm window under DECwindows or
|
||
when using a VT320 video terminal.
|
||
Default: Enable
|
||
|
||
Auto Repeat
|
||
When you press a key longer than normal, it repeats until you release it.
|
||
To disable the auto repeat feature, click on the Disable button. The Help
|
||
and Do keys never autorepeat.
|
||
When disabled in this dialog box, the auto repeat feature remains off
|
||
regardless of the setting of the Auto Repeat button in the Customize
|
||
VTE Keyboard dialog box, or host software customized settings (including
|
||
remote session managers).
|
||
When enabled in this dialog box, the auto repeat feature can be turned on
|
||
or off in the Customize VTE Keyboard dialog box, or by host software.
|
||
Default: Enable
|
||
|
||
Lock Key State
|
||
Normally when you press the lock key on the keyboard, the alphabetic
|
||
keys send uppercase letters but the number keys do not send their shifted
|
||
character.
|
||
When you click on the Shift Lock button, all keys send their shifted
|
||
character.
|
||
Default: Caps Lock
|
||
|
||
Keyboard Type
|
||
The VT1000 keyboard comes in different models for different languages
|
||
and dialects. The location of some characters varies depending on the
|
||
keyboard model. Make sure the keyboard type matches your keyboard
|
||
model, so the system sends the correct character when you press the
|
||
corresponding key.
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 7
|
||
Customizing the VT1000 Terminal Manager 117
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
The default keyboard type is North American. If you have any other
|
||
keyboard model, you must select the correct keyboard type when the
|
||
terminal is installed.
|
||
To find your keyboard model number: Turn the keyboard upside
|
||
down and look for a label that specifies the model number. The model
|
||
number should be in a format similar to LK401-xx or nn-nnnnn-xx. Use
|
||
the xx value to choose your keyboard type from the Keyboard Type scroll
|
||
box.
|
||
For example, if you have a British keyboard and the model number is
|
||
LK401-AA, you choose LK401-AA British.
|
||
To use this new keyboard type for all future sessions, save the new setting
|
||
before you end the current session. See ‘‘Saving and Recalling Settings’’
|
||
in this chapter.
|
||
When using DECwindows: The DECwindows host session manager has
|
||
a similar customize option. Digital recommends that you leave the host
|
||
setting at System Default to avoid having the host session manager and
|
||
local terminal manager compete to set the keyboard. There are subtle
|
||
differences between the LK401 keyboard layouts supported by the VT1000
|
||
and the LK201 keyboard layouts supported by DECwindows.
|
||
Default: North American
|
||
|
||
Keyboard Mode
|
||
You can specify whether you want your keyboard to act as a typewriter
|
||
(TW) or data processing (DP) keyboard. This setting affects keys with
|
||
three or more characters. If you choose a data processing keyboard, these
|
||
keys send the characters on the right half of their keycaps. If you choose
|
||
a typewriter keyboard, these keys send the characters on the left half of
|
||
their keycaps.
|
||
For the following keyboard types, the typewriter and data processing
|
||
settings are identical:
|
||
• North American and Dutch
|
||
• When using 8-bit multinational characters: British, German, and
|
||
Portuguese
|
||
Default: Typewriter
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 7
|
||
118 Customizing the VT1000 Terminal Manager
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Choosing the Display Language
|
||
Customize Language
|
||
The VT1000 Terminal Manager supports three languages: English,
|
||
French, and German. After you apply your selection, the terminal
|
||
displays text in the language you selected. To change your display
|
||
language setting, choose the Language . . . menu item from the Customize
|
||
menu. The Customize Language dialog box appears:
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
GSF_1047_89.RAGS
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
To select a language, click on the appropriate button.
|
||
The selected language only applies to the VT1000 terminal locally. There
|
||
may be times when your host application has a different setting than your
|
||
terminal.
|
||
Default: English
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 7
|
||
Customizing the VT1000 Terminal Manager 119
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Changing Your Pointer and Mouse Settings
|
||
You can change the shape and color of the pointer, as well as certain
|
||
mouse features. To change your mouse and pointer settings, choose the
|
||
Pointer . . . menu item from the VT1000 Terminal Manager’s Customize
|
||
menu. The Customize Pointer dialog box on your monochrome VT1000
|
||
terminal looks like this:
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
From the Customize Pointer dialog box, you can change any of the
|
||
following settings:
|
||
|
||
Button Arrangement
|
||
The default mouse button arrangement is natural for a right-handed
|
||
user—MB1 on the left of the mouse and MB3 on the right. If you are
|
||
left-handed, you can click on the Left Handed button. This makes MB1
|
||
the right mouse button and MB3 the left mouse button. MB2 is always
|
||
the middle button.
|
||
Default: Right Handed
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 7
|
||
120 Customizing the VT1000 Terminal Manager
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Pointer Color
|
||
The pointer consists of an outline and filled center. On your monochrome
|
||
VT1000 terminal, the pointer’s filled area is normally white with a black
|
||
outline. To reverse the fill and outline colors, click on the Black button.
|
||
To see your changes, click on the Apply button or OK button in the dialog
|
||
box.
|
||
Default: White
|
||
|
||
Pointer Shape
|
||
To change the pointer shape, scroll through the list of shapes and select
|
||
the one you want.
|
||
Default: Upper Left Arrow
|
||
|
||
Mouse Double Click Timeout
|
||
Video terminal (VTE) windows can tell two single clicks from a double
|
||
click, based on the speed at which buttons are clicked. To change the time
|
||
allowed for making the second click in a double-click sequence, drag the
|
||
arrow in the slider to the right or left, or move the pointer to a location on
|
||
the slider and click MB1.
|
||
|
||
Changing Your Print Screen Settings
|
||
The terminal’s Customize Print Screen dialog box lets you control certain
|
||
printing features. To view the print screen settings, choose the Print
|
||
Screen . . . menu item from the VT1000 Terminal Manager’s Customize
|
||
menu. The Customize Print Screen dialog box appears:
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 7
|
||
Customizing the VT1000 Terminal Manager 121
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
From the Customize Print Screen dialog box, you can change the following
|
||
settings:
|
||
|
||
Pixel Aspect Ratio
|
||
You can select the pixel aspect ratio to match the dot density of the
|
||
printer you are using. A pixel aspect ratio of 1 to 1 is appropriate for
|
||
most printers.
|
||
• For level 2 printers such as the LA75 or LN03, use a pixel aspect ratio
|
||
of 1 to 1.
|
||
• For level 1 printers such as the LA50, use a pixel aspect ratio
|
||
of 2 to 1.
|
||
Default: 1 to 1
|
||
|
||
Rotate/Scale Picture
|
||
For wide screen images, you can have the terminal rotate and scale the
|
||
image so it fits on the printed page. Click on the Rotate/Scale Picture
|
||
button to automatically rotate and scale an image sent to the printer.
|
||
Default: off
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 7
|
||
122 Customizing the VT1000 Terminal Manager
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Ribbon or Toner Saver
|
||
Normally, screen snapshots are printed as you would expect—the image is
|
||
dark, and the background is light. If you have an image that fills most of
|
||
the screen, this may consume a great deal of printer ribbon or toner. To
|
||
reverse the dark and light portions of the printed output and save ribbon
|
||
or toner, click on the Negative Image button.
|
||
Default: Positive Image
|
||
|
||
Print FF Mode
|
||
The VT1000 terminal can send a form feed (FF) character to the printer
|
||
port at the end of a print screen operation. If you want to send a form
|
||
feed, click on the Form Feed button.
|
||
Default: No Form Feed
|
||
|
||
Changing Your Security Settings
|
||
To prevent unauthorized connections to your terminal, you can enter a
|
||
list of authorized users that can connect to your terminal. You can also
|
||
lock your customize dialog boxes to prevent accidental and unauthorized
|
||
changes to your customized settings.
|
||
Choose the Security . . . menu item from the VT1000 Terminal Manager’s
|
||
Customize menu to display the Customize Security dialog box:
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 7
|
||
Customizing the VT1000 Terminal Manager 123
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
From the Customize Security dialog box, you can change any of the
|
||
following settings:
|
||
|
||
LAT Connections and TCP/IP Connections
|
||
You can choose which hosts can connect to your VT1000 terminal. Only
|
||
authorized hosts can make connections to the terminal. To allow all hosts,
|
||
no hosts, or only those authorized to connect to the terminal, click on the
|
||
appropriate button.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 7
|
||
124 Customizing the VT1000 Terminal Manager
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
All This is the default setting. Any system on the Ethernet can establish
|
||
an X connection with your terminal. Use this setting if you are part of
|
||
a small group running interactive applications that require sharing of
|
||
information in realtime.
|
||
Authorized Only When you choose this setting, only the systems and users
|
||
entered in the Authorized Users scroll box can establish X connections
|
||
with your terminal. This setting requires that you authorize your own
|
||
account in addition to any others that need access to your display.
|
||
None This setting prevents any X connection to your terminal, regardless
|
||
of source. This is useful if you use the VT1000 as multiple VT320
|
||
terminals in a confidential environment, and do not want any other
|
||
user’s applications to display on your screen or to request data from your
|
||
screen.
|
||
If you choose the None setting, any connection request from the LAT X
|
||
Session menu item in the Create menu will fail.
|
||
Default: All
|
||
|
||
Add an Authorized User
|
||
You can maintain a list of four authorized users. These users have
|
||
immediate access to your VT1000 terminal. The VT1000 stores the node
|
||
names, usernames, and transports (LAT or TCP/IP) of these users, in
|
||
nonvolatile memory.
|
||
To add an authorized user to the Authorized Users box:
|
||
1. Enter a node name or IP address into the Node text entry field, then
|
||
press the Return key.
|
||
Examples: DELTA or 123.45.67.89
|
||
2. Enter a username into the Username text entry field, then press
|
||
Return . You can use the asterisk (*) wildcard character to specify all
|
||
users.
|
||
Examples: Smith or *
|
||
For TCP/IP: Use the asterisk (*) wildcard character, to specify all
|
||
users. The TCP/IP protocol does not track usernames, so you cannot
|
||
authorize individual users when accepting TCP/IP connections. If the
|
||
node is an approved IP address, the VT1000 accepts any connections
|
||
from that node.
|
||
3. Enter a transport (communication protocol) into the Transport text
|
||
entry field, then press Return .
|
||
|
||
Chapter 7
|
||
Customizing the VT1000 Terminal Manager 125
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Examples: LAT or TCP.
|
||
The newly authorized user appears in the Authorized Users box.
|
||
|
||
Remove an Authorized User
|
||
To remove an authorized user from the Authorized Users box:
|
||
1. In the Authorized Users box, click on the username of the user you
|
||
want to remove.
|
||
2. Click on the Remove button.
|
||
|
||
Accept Connections When Idle
|
||
Your VT1000 terminal has the ability to accept connections from
|
||
authorized host systems when idle. The terminal is idle from the time it
|
||
is turned on and completes it power-up tests until a menu item is chosen
|
||
in the VT1000 Terminal Manager.
|
||
This feature lets your terminal act as a slave display device requiring
|
||
no active intervention. To enable this feature, click on the Accept
|
||
Connections When Idle button. This allows the terminal to accept X
|
||
window and DECwindows connections when idle.
|
||
|
||
NOTE
|
||
For desktop units where people frequently log in, accepting
|
||
connections when idle may be a security risk. Digital recommends
|
||
that you leave this feature off for desktop units.
|
||
Default: off—reject connections when idle
|
||
|
||
Locking Your Customize Dialog Boxes
|
||
You can lock your VTE or VT1000 Terminal Manager customize dialog
|
||
boxes to prevent accidental and unauthorized changes to your customized
|
||
settings. You can also choose whether or not to make a locked customize
|
||
dialog box visible. By default, all customized dialog boxes are unlocked.
|
||
When you lock dialog boxes, the Customize Security Password dialog box
|
||
appears. See ‘‘Activating Customize Password Security ’’ in this chapter.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 7
|
||
126 Customizing the VT1000 Terminal Manager
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Lock Customize Security
|
||
You can lock the Terminal Manager’s Customize Security dialog box to
|
||
prevent unauthorized users from adding more users to the Authorized
|
||
Users list. Click on the Lock Customize Security toggle button, then click
|
||
on the OK button or Apply button. The Customize Security Password
|
||
dialog box appears.
|
||
Default: Unlocked
|
||
|
||
Lock Terminal Manager Customize
|
||
You can lock all customize dialog boxes in the VT1000 Terminal
|
||
Manager Customize menu, to prevent unauthorized users from changing
|
||
customized settings. Click on the Lock Terminal Manager Customize
|
||
toggle button, then click on the OK button or Apply button. The
|
||
Customize Security Password dialog box appears.
|
||
Default: Unlocked
|
||
|
||
Lock VTE Customize
|
||
You can lock all customize dialog boxes in the VTE Customize menu, to
|
||
prevent unauthorized users from changing customized settings. Click on
|
||
the Lock VTE Customize toggle button, then click on the OK button or
|
||
Apply button. The Customize Security Password dialog box appears.
|
||
Default: Unlocked
|
||
|
||
Locked Screens Visible
|
||
You can choose whether or not to make locked customize dialog boxes
|
||
visible. To change the current setting, click on the Locked Screen Visible
|
||
toggle button, then click on the OK or Apply button.
|
||
Default: off—locked screens not visible
|
||
If a customize dialog box is locked and visible: When you choose the
|
||
customize dialog box from the Customize menu, the dialog box appears
|
||
but you cannot change any settings. The one exception is the Customize
|
||
Security dialog box. It always requires a password if it is locked.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 7
|
||
Customizing the VT1000 Terminal Manager 127
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
If a customize dialog box is locked and not visible: When you choose that
|
||
customize dialog box from the Customize menu, a Password prompt
|
||
appears. You must enter the correct security password before you can
|
||
display the dialog box.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
To display a locked customize dialog box that is not visible: Enter your
|
||
security password and click on the OK button. If you enter the correct
|
||
password, the selected customize dialog box is displayed and you can
|
||
make changes to the settings. If you enter an incorrect password, the
|
||
terminal displays a User authorization failure box.
|
||
If you select . . . The terminal . . .
|
||
OK Verifies that your password is correct.
|
||
|
||
Clear Clears the password field.
|
||
|
||
Cancel Dismisses the password prompt.
|
||
If you forget the password, contact Digital Customer Services to perform
|
||
a secure reset. A secure reset erases all of the terminal’s nonvolatile
|
||
memory (except the secure reset count) and resets the terminal’s operating
|
||
features to their factory-default settings.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 7
|
||
128 Customizing the VT1000 Terminal Manager
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Activating Customize Password Security
|
||
To prevent accidental or unauthorized changes to your VTE or VT1000
|
||
Terminal Manager customize dialog boxes, use the Lock . . . toggle
|
||
buttons in the Customize Security dialog box. When you turn on one of
|
||
these toggle buttons and click on the Apply or OK button, the Customize
|
||
Security Password dialog box appears. From the Customize Security
|
||
Password dialog box, you can enter a new customize security password or
|
||
use the current password.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
From the Customize Security Password dialog box, you can choose the
|
||
following items:
|
||
|
||
Enter Password
|
||
To enter or change the security password, type a new password (up to 127
|
||
characters) into the Enter Password text entry field. The terminal does
|
||
not display the characters you enter, and the cursor does not move. Then
|
||
click on the Verify Password text entry field.
|
||
|
||
Verify Password
|
||
To make sure the password you entered is correct, reenter the password
|
||
into the Verify Password text entry field. The terminal does not display
|
||
the characters you enter, and the cursor does not move. After you enter
|
||
the password, click on the OK button to activate the password and dismiss
|
||
the dialog box.
|
||
If you enter the incorrect password, the terminal displays a Password
|
||
Verification Error box.
|
||
To save the password for future sessions, use the Save Current Settings
|
||
menu item in the VT1000 Terminal Manager’s Customize menu.
|
||
Chapter 7
|
||
Customizing the VT1000 Terminal Manager 129
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Use Previous Password
|
||
If you already entered a password in this session (or saved a password in
|
||
a previous session), you can click on the Use Previous Password button to
|
||
quickly dismiss this dialog box and activate your customize password.
|
||
|
||
OK, Clear, and Cancel
|
||
If you select . . . The terminal . . .
|
||
OK Activates the password.
|
||
|
||
Clear Clears both password text entry fields and moves
|
||
the cursor to the Enter Password text field.
|
||
|
||
Cancel Dismisses the Customize Security Password dialog
|
||
box and returns to the Customize Security dialog
|
||
box without activating password security.
|
||
|
||
Changing Your Window Settings
|
||
You can change the look of your terminal’s window display. For example,
|
||
you can change the background pattern, window color, and screen color.
|
||
To change your window settings, choose the Window . . . menu item
|
||
from the VT1000 Terminal Manager’s Customize menu. The Customize
|
||
Window dialog box looks like this:
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 7
|
||
130 Customizing the VT1000 Terminal Manager
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
GSF_1051_89.RAGS
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Some changes take effect when you click on the Apply button or OK
|
||
button in the Customize Window dialog box. Others take effect in your
|
||
next session. See the individual features for details.
|
||
From the Customize Window dialog box, you can change any of the
|
||
following settings:
|
||
|
||
Screen Saver
|
||
The Screen Saver extends the life of your monitor by shutting off its
|
||
display after a specified time. Normally, the terminal shuts off its display
|
||
after 10 minutes of keyboard or mouse inactivity. You can vary the time
|
||
before the screen goes blank, from 1 to 60 minutes.
|
||
• To vary the time the screen saver waits before shutting down the
|
||
display, drag the arrow in the slider to the right of left, or move the
|
||
pointer to a spot on the slider and click MB1.
|
||
• To keep the display on indefinitely, click on the Disable button.
|
||
• Click on the Apply button or OK button to apply your change.
|
||
|
||
Chapter 7
|
||
Customizing the VT1000 Terminal Manager 131
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
You can check if the screen saver is on by looking at the keyboard
|
||
indicator lights. The lights blink in a regular pattern when the screen
|
||
saver is on.
|
||
Default: 10 minutes
|
||
|
||
Allow Remote Window Manager
|
||
You can choose whether or not a host-based window manager can take
|
||
over windowing operations on the screen. The VT1000’s local window
|
||
manager provides you with quicker response time and overall higher
|
||
performance. However, a host-based window manager may offer more
|
||
features. To let the host control windowing operations, click on the Allow
|
||
Remote Window Manager button.
|
||
Default: off
|
||
|
||
Screen Background Pattern
|
||
Normally, the screen background pattern is a tight, gray crossweave. To
|
||
change the background pattern, click on a pattern in the pattern palette.
|
||
The pattern you select appears in the pattern viewer. Click on the Apply
|
||
button or OK button to see your selection in effect.
|
||
You can also create a solid background by clicking on one of two
|
||
background pattern buttons next to the Default button.
|
||
• Click on the left button to create a solid background in the screen
|
||
foreground color. For example, if the Screen Color is Black on White
|
||
on your monochrome system, click on the left button in the Screen
|
||
Background Pattern to see a solid black background.
|
||
• Click on the middle button to create a solid background in the screen
|
||
background color.
|
||
Default: Gray crossweave
|
||
|
||
Window Manager Icon Style
|
||
Normally, the icons stored in the Icon Box are small. Click on the Large
|
||
button to change the size of the icons. If you save your changes, the Icon
|
||
Box will contain large icons when you start your next session.
|
||
Default: Small
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 7
|
||
132 Customizing the VT1000 Terminal Manager
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Screen Color
|
||
The screen pattern, when set to anything other than the default pattern,
|
||
consists of a screen foreground (the filled area in the pattern) and a screen
|
||
background (the pattern’s outline).
|
||
On your monochrome VT1000 terminal, the screen color is normally black.
|
||
Click on the White on Black option button to reverse the fill and outline
|
||
colors.
|
||
To see your new setting in effect, click on the Apply button or OK button.
|
||
Default: Black on White
|
||
|
||
Window Color
|
||
The Window Color setting controls the color of text or graphics in a
|
||
window. On your monochrome VT1000 terminal, the window color is
|
||
normally black. Click on the White On Black button to change the
|
||
window color to white.
|
||
If you save your changes by clicking on the Apply button or OK button,
|
||
your new setting takes effect when you start your next session.
|
||
Default: Black on White
|
||
|
||
Controlling the Display of Messages
|
||
You can choose whether or not to have the terminal display certain
|
||
messages, such as connection requests. You can choose settings that
|
||
suit your preference or the needs of your application software. Messages
|
||
appear in the Messages region of the VT1000 Terminal Manager Window.
|
||
Choose the Terminal Manager... menu item from the VT1000 Terminal
|
||
Manager’s Customize menu. The Customize Terminal Manager dialog box
|
||
looks like this:
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 7
|
||
Customizing the VT1000 Terminal Manager 133
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
GSF_1368_89.RAGS
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
From the Customize Terminal Manager dialog box, you can change any of
|
||
the following settings:
|
||
|
||
Confirm Quit Session
|
||
When you quit a session from the Session menu, the terminal normally
|
||
asks for confirmation. You can turn this feature on or off by clicking on
|
||
the Confirm Quit Session toggle button. If you turn this feature off, the
|
||
terminal ends the current session immediately after you choose Quit from
|
||
the Session menu.
|
||
Default: enabled
|
||
|
||
Display Connection Requests
|
||
The terminal can display connection requests in the Messages region.
|
||
You can turn this feature on or off by clicking on the Display Connection
|
||
Requests toggle button.
|
||
Default: enabled
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 7
|
||
134 Customizing the VT1000 Terminal Manager
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Display Rejected Connection Requests
|
||
Normally, the terminal does not display rejected connection requests.
|
||
You can choose to have the terminal display the rejection messages in
|
||
the Messages region. To turn this feature on or off, click on the Display
|
||
Rejected Connection Requests toggle button.
|
||
Default: disabled
|
||
|
||
Display Diagnostics Messages
|
||
Diagnostic messages indicate any problem with the network server or
|
||
terminal. Normally, the terminal does not display these messages. You
|
||
can choose to have the terminal display the diagnostic messages in the
|
||
Messages region. To turn this feature on or off, click on the Display
|
||
Diagnostic Messages toggle button.
|
||
Default: disabled
|
||
|
||
Messages Region
|
||
You can scroll through text in the Messages region. The Scroll Lines
|
||
Saved slider lets you specify how many lines scrolled out of the region to
|
||
save. Any extra lines are lost.
|
||
This feature does not affect the size of the Messages region. The width
|
||
of the Messages region can change if you change the VT1000 Terminal
|
||
Manager window size.
|
||
|
||
Header Text
|
||
You can specify the text of the header the terminal uses for the Messages
|
||
region. Just click on the Header Text field, then enter your header. The
|
||
message header can have up to 30 characters.
|
||
Default: Messages
|
||
|
||
Changing Your Host Port or Printer Port Settings
|
||
You can specify the communication settings of the terminal’s serial host
|
||
and printer ports to make them compatible with your host system. The
|
||
default settings work with most Digital systems. Make sure the settings
|
||
you use match your host system.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 7
|
||
Customizing the VT1000 Terminal Manager 135
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
The host port is for connecting to a host system. The printer port is for
|
||
connecting either to a local printer or a second host. Each port uses a
|
||
DEC-423, 6-pin connector.
|
||
|
||
NOTE
|
||
You cannot use X windows or DECwindows over the host
|
||
or printer port. These ports are for traditional terminal
|
||
communication with host systems. You must use the Ethernet
|
||
connector to use X windows or DECwindows.
|
||
The Customize Host Port and Customize Printer Port dialog boxes are
|
||
identical, except for a few extra buttons in the Customize Printer Port
|
||
dialog box.
|
||
To change the host port settings, choose the Host Port... menu item from
|
||
the VT1000 Terminal Manager’s Customize menu. The Customize Host
|
||
Port dialog box looks like this:
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 7
|
||
136 Customizing the VT1000 Terminal Manager
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
To change the printer port settings, choose the Printer Port... menu item
|
||
from the VT1000 Terminal Manager’s Customize menu. The Customize
|
||
Printer Port dialog box looks like this:
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
From the Customize Host or Printer Port dialog box, you can change any
|
||
of the following settings:
|
||
|
||
Transmit
|
||
You can select the speed the terminal uses to send data to the host system
|
||
or printer. Normally, the terminal’s host port uses a speed of 9600 baud,
|
||
and the printer port uses a speed of 4800 baud. These settings work with
|
||
most Digital systems. To select another speed, click on the button next to
|
||
the speed you want.
|
||
The VT1000 terminal does not support speeds lower than 300 baud.
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 7
|
||
Customizing the VT1000 Terminal Manager 137
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Default: 9600 for host port, 4800 for printer port
|
||
|
||
Receive
|
||
You can choose the speed the terminal uses to receive data from the
|
||
host system or printer. Normally, the terminal’s receive speed matches
|
||
its transmit speed (rx = tx). However, the terminal can transmit at one
|
||
speed and receive at another. To choose another speed, click on the button
|
||
next to the speed you want. Make sure you choose a receive speed that
|
||
matches your host’s or printer’s transmit speed.
|
||
Default: rx = tx
|
||
|
||
Character Format
|
||
You can choose the word size and number of parity bits used to
|
||
communicate with the host system or printer. The terminal uses a default
|
||
word size of 8 bits and no parity. This setting works with most of today’s
|
||
computer systems.
|
||
Default: 8-bit, No Parity
|
||
|
||
Stop Bits
|
||
You can choose the number of stop bits used in the character format.
|
||
Digital recommends using one stop bit for most applications. To select two
|
||
stop bits, click on the Two button.
|
||
Default: One
|
||
|
||
XOFF At
|
||
You can choose how many characters the terminal stores in its receive
|
||
buffer before sending the host or printer an XOFF signal to stop sending
|
||
data. Normally, the terminal sends XOFF to the host when the input
|
||
buffer contains 64 characters. See Appendix C for details. To choose 128
|
||
characters or no XOFF, click on the appropriate button.
|
||
Default: 64
|
||
|
||
Use as (in Customize Printer Port dialog box only)
|
||
Normally, the printer port acts as a printer port. When you use this
|
||
setting, you can connect a local printer to the terminal for print screen
|
||
operations. You can choose one of four functions for the printer port:
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 7
|
||
138 Customizing the VT1000 Terminal Manager
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Choose . . . To . . .
|
||
|
||
Host Port Use the printer port to connect the terminal to a second
|
||
host system.
|
||
Printer Port Use the printer port to connect a local printer.
|
||
2-Way Printer Port Let the printer send control information to the host.
|
||
Diagnostics Port Unsupported.
|
||
|
||
To choose the Host Port or 2-Way Printer Port settings, click on the
|
||
appropriate button.
|
||
Default: Printer Port
|
||
|
||
Changing Your LAT Settings
|
||
VMS systems use the local area transport (LAT) protocol to connect to the
|
||
terminal. You can control the list of hosts and services that can connect to
|
||
your terminal. The terminal uses LAT group codes to identify hosts and
|
||
services. The terminal can store 256 group codes (0–255). Your system
|
||
manager can also adjust the performance of LAT connections.
|
||
To change LAT settings and adjust performance, choose the LAT...
|
||
menu item from the VT1000 Terminal Manager’s Customize menu. The
|
||
Customize LAT dialog box looks like this:
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 7
|
||
Customizing the VT1000 Terminal Manager 139
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
From the Customize LAT dialog box, you can change any of the following
|
||
settings:
|
||
|
||
Group Codes
|
||
The Group Codes scroll box lets you maintain a list of the groups of hosts
|
||
or services that you want to access. The LAT protocol uses group codes
|
||
to limit the number of network services that a device must identify and
|
||
communicate with. On a large local area network, requiring the terminal
|
||
to communicate with all the available services may overflow the services
|
||
list in the LAT Terminal Window Service Select or LAT X Session Service
|
||
Select dialog boxes.
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 7
|
||
140 Customizing the VT1000 Terminal Manager
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
By default, all LAT devices are set to use group code 0 so they can all
|
||
communicate. In a large network, the network manager can choose
|
||
to change the group code for some services. For example, the services
|
||
associated with an engineering group might be in group 1, while the
|
||
manufacturing group’s services are in group 2.
|
||
Ask your system manager for your service’s group code. If the code is 0,
|
||
you can use the terminal immediately. If the code is another value, you
|
||
can add it to the list.
|
||
Default: Group Code 0
|
||
To add a new group code:
|
||
1. Use your keyboard to enter the group code into the text entry field.
|
||
2. Click on the Add button. The new group code appears in the Group
|
||
Codes scroll box.
|
||
3. Repeat this procedure for each group code you want to add.
|
||
To remove a group code from the list:
|
||
1. In the scroll box, click on the group code you want to remove.
|
||
2. Click on the Remove button.
|
||
To enable all the group codes on your network:
|
||
Click on the Add All button to enable the terminal to use all group codes
|
||
on your network. Remember that the terminal can store a limit of 256
|
||
group codes. You should only use this feature if your network has a low
|
||
number of group codes.
|
||
To remove all the group codes from the scroll box:
|
||
Click on the Remove All button.
|
||
|
||
LAT Slide Bars (For System Managers)
|
||
You can fine tune the characteristics of your LAT environment by
|
||
adjusting the four slide bars provided in the Customize LAT dialog box.
|
||
See your system manager for the optimal settings of these slide bars.
|
||
They directly affect the performance of your local area network and
|
||
should only be adjusted by system management personnel. The slide
|
||
bars are not intended to be randomly set according to the preference of
|
||
individual users. Poor adjustments can produce poor network and VT1000
|
||
terminal performance.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 7
|
||
Customizing the VT1000 Terminal Manager 141
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
There are four slide bars:
|
||
LAT VTE Circuit Timer
|
||
You set the LAT VTE Circuit Timer to tune the network for the best
|
||
response time and network performance when running video terminal
|
||
(VTE) windows. The optimum setting depends on the number of users
|
||
on the local area network and the typical network traffic conditions.
|
||
The normal setting of 80 milliseconds works well with most Digital
|
||
systems.
|
||
Default: 80 milliseconds
|
||
LAT X Circuit Timer
|
||
You set the LAT X Circuit Timer to tune the network for the best
|
||
response time and network performance when running an X window
|
||
or DECwindows session. The optimum setting depends on the number
|
||
of users on the local area network and the typical network traffic
|
||
conditions. The normal setting of 30 milliseconds works well with
|
||
most Digital systems.
|
||
Default: 30 milliseconds
|
||
Retransmit Limit
|
||
To make a LAT connection to a host system, the terminal sends out
|
||
a request-to-connect message then waits for an acknowledgement. If
|
||
the host does not acknowledge the request, the terminal resends the
|
||
message a specified number of times.
|
||
The Retransmit Limit tells the terminal how many times to resend
|
||
the message. If the terminal does not receive an acknowledgement
|
||
after sending the message the specified number of times, the terminal
|
||
stops requesting a connection and indicates it could not connect to
|
||
that host.
|
||
Normally, the terminal resends the message eight times before it stops
|
||
trying to connect. This setting works well with most Digital systems.
|
||
Default: 8 times
|
||
Keep Alive Timer
|
||
When the terminal is inactive, it sends certain LAT messages out
|
||
on the network every few seconds to keep the LAT connection alive.
|
||
Normally, the terminal sends messages out every 20 seconds. This
|
||
setting works well with most Digital systems.
|
||
Default: 20 seconds
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 7
|
||
142 Customizing the VT1000 Terminal Manager
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Changing Your TCP/IP Settings (ULTRIX and UNIX
|
||
Systems)
|
||
ULTRIX and UNIX systems use the TCP/IP protocol to connect to the
|
||
terminal. From the Customize TCP/IP dialog box, you can enter the
|
||
terminal’s IP address and subnet mask. You can also open dialog boxes
|
||
for changing the name server and network routing tables.
|
||
Choose the TCP/IP... menu item from the VT1000 Terminal Manager’s
|
||
Customize menu. The Customize TCP/IP dialog box looks like this:
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
From the Customize TCP/IP dialog box, you can change any of the
|
||
following settings:
|
||
|
||
Determine IP Address
|
||
Clicking on this button makes the terminal determine its IP address,
|
||
using the UDP/IP BOOTP protocol. BOOTP is an Internet protocol that
|
||
determines an IP address.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 7
|
||
Customizing the VT1000 Terminal Manager 143
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
After you click on the Determine IP Address button, a few messages
|
||
appear in the Messages region of the VT1000 Terminal Manager window,
|
||
along with the IP address of the terminal. The next time you enter the
|
||
Customize TCP/IP dialog box, the terminal’s IP address appears in the
|
||
VT1000 IP Address (manual): text entry field.
|
||
|
||
NOTE
|
||
The system manager of a host system running the BOOTP daemon
|
||
must configure your terminal’s hardware and IP address into the
|
||
BOOTP daemon’s configuration file.
|
||
|
||
TCP/IP Name Server...
|
||
Clicking on this button displays the Customize TCP/IP Name Server
|
||
dialog box. See ‘‘Changing Your TCP/IP Name Server Settings’’ in this
|
||
chapter.
|
||
|
||
TCP/IP Routing Tables...
|
||
Clicking on this button displays the Customize TCP/IP Routing Tables
|
||
dialog box. See ‘‘Changing Your TCP/IP Routing Table Settings’’ in this
|
||
chapter.
|
||
|
||
VT1000 IP Address (manual):
|
||
You can manually enter an IP address for your terminal. See your system
|
||
manager for an address to use. To enter the address, click on the VT1000
|
||
IP Address (manual): text entry field. After you enter an address, click
|
||
on the OK button to save the address (for this session only) and dismiss
|
||
the dialog box.
|
||
|
||
IP Subnet Mask:
|
||
You can manually enter an IP subnet mask for your terminal. An IP
|
||
subnet mask acts as a filter for your TCP/IP network. Using the subnet
|
||
mask makes the terminal ignore certain traffic on the network.
|
||
See your system manager for a subnet mask to use. To enter an IP subnet
|
||
mask, click on the IP Subnet Mask: text entry field. After you enter the
|
||
IP subnet mask, click on the OK button to save the mask (for this session
|
||
only) and dismiss the dialog box.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 7
|
||
144 Customizing the VT1000 Terminal Manager
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Changing Your TCP/IP Name Server Settings
|
||
If your system has name servers, you can specify host names instead of
|
||
addresses in the TELNET Terminal Window Host Select dialog box. A
|
||
name server resolves destination names into network addresses.
|
||
You can specify a primary and secondary Berkeley Internet Name Domain
|
||
(BIND) name server. You can also determine and change the terminal’s
|
||
domain name. See your system manager for your name server’s IP
|
||
address.
|
||
Choose the TCP/IP... menu item from the VT1000 Terminal Manager’s
|
||
Customize menu. The Customize TCP/IP dialog box appears. Click on
|
||
the TCP/IP Name Server... button. If you have not entered an IP address
|
||
for the terminal in this dialog box, the TCP/IP Name Server... button is
|
||
dimmed (not selectable). The Customize TCP/IP Name Server dialog box
|
||
looks like this:
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
From the Customize TCP/IP Name Server dialog box, you can change any
|
||
of the following settings:
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 7
|
||
Customizing the VT1000 Terminal Manager 145
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Primary Name Server
|
||
The terminal first attempts to use the primary name server to resolve
|
||
names entered into fields requiring a host name or IP address.
|
||
To enter or change the primary name server, click on the text entry field
|
||
and enter the primary name server’s IP address.
|
||
|
||
Secondary Name Server
|
||
If the terminal cannot resolve a host name or IP address with the primary
|
||
name server, the terminal queries the secondary name server.
|
||
To enter or change the secondary name server, click on the text entry field
|
||
and enter the secondary name server’s IP address.
|
||
|
||
Determine Domain Name
|
||
When you click on this button, the terminal tries to determine its own
|
||
domain name. You must have previously entered a primary or secondary
|
||
name server and clicked on the Apply button. Name resolution is not
|
||
possible without a valid domain name. After determining its domain
|
||
name, the terminal displays the name in the Domain Name text entry
|
||
field.
|
||
|
||
Domain Name
|
||
To enter or change the domain name, click on the text entry field and
|
||
enter the domain name. Example: MYORG.MYCOMP.COM.
|
||
|
||
Changing Your TCP/IP Routing Table Settings
|
||
From the TCP/IP Routing Tables dialog box, you can update the network
|
||
routing tables. If you have not entered an IP address, the TCP/IP Routing
|
||
Tables... button is dimmed (not selectable).
|
||
Choose the TCP/IP... menu item from the VT1000 Terminal Manager’s
|
||
Customize menu. Click on the TCP/IP Routing Tables... button. The
|
||
Customize TCP/IP Routing Tables dialog box looks like this:
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 7
|
||
146 Customizing the VT1000 Terminal Manager
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
From the Customize TCP/IP Routing Tables dialog box, you can add or
|
||
remove a temporary or preferred route. You can save preferred routes for
|
||
future sessions by using the Save Current Settings menu item from the
|
||
Customize menu. The terminal does not save temporary routes for future
|
||
sessions.
|
||
Although the Temporary Routes and Preferred Routes boxes only display
|
||
the route destination, both a destination and a gateway are stored for
|
||
each entry.
|
||
|
||
Temporary and Preferred Routes
|
||
To add a route:
|
||
1. Specify whether the route applies to either a host or a network, by
|
||
clicking on the Host or Network button. If you click on the Auto
|
||
button, the terminal tries to determine if the route is for a host or a
|
||
network.
|
||
|
||
Chapter 7
|
||
Customizing the VT1000 Terminal Manager 147
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
2. Enter the route’s data into the Destination and Gateway text entry
|
||
fields.
|
||
3. Click on the Add box beside the Temporary or Preferred Routes box.
|
||
You can save preferred routes for future sessions by using the Save
|
||
Current Settings menu item in the VT1000 Terminal Manager’s
|
||
Customize menu.
|
||
To view or change stored data for a route:
|
||
Click on the route’s destination displayed in the Temporary Routes or
|
||
Preferred Routes scroll box. The terminal displays the route’s destination
|
||
and gateway in their text entry fields.
|
||
To remove a route:
|
||
1. Click on the route’s destination displayed in the Temporary Routes or
|
||
Preferred Routes scroll box.
|
||
2. Click on the Remove button next to the scroll box.
|
||
|
||
Changing Your Font Path Settings
|
||
A font is a set of characters in a particular type style. The terminal
|
||
displays characters from a selected font. The terminal has its own set of
|
||
character fonts, but for some applications you may need to use alternate
|
||
fonts available on your host system. To find a font file on the host, the
|
||
terminal needs a font path.
|
||
You need to enter a font path before using X window sessions and
|
||
applications, because the terminal’s ROM fonts do not contain all the
|
||
required fonts. The terminal will allow you to create an X session without
|
||
a font path, but you will have to quit and restart the terminal to set the
|
||
font path.
|
||
After you make a connection that uses the font path, you cannot change
|
||
the font path without quitting from the session. The Font Path... menu
|
||
item is dimmed and not selectable.
|
||
You can specify a font path by choosing the Font Path... menu item from
|
||
the VT1000 Terminal Manager’s Customize menu. The Customize Font
|
||
Path dialog box looks like this:
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 7
|
||
148 Customizing the VT1000 Terminal Manager
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
From the Customize Font Path dialog box, you can change any of the
|
||
following settings:
|
||
|
||
Font Path Selection
|
||
The Font Path Selection determines which font path is active. If your
|
||
terminal communicates over the LAT protocol, click on the LAT Font
|
||
Path button. If your terminal communicates over the TCP/IP or TELNET
|
||
protocol, click on the TFTP Font Path button.
|
||
|
||
LAT Font Path
|
||
Before you enter a font path, the terminal uses only its own fonts stored
|
||
in ROM. The first entry in the LAT Font Path field is ROM, indicating
|
||
the terminal is using its own fonts. Always leave the ROM entry at the
|
||
beginning of the field.
|
||
If you enter a font path pointing to a node on your system, the terminal
|
||
uses the font files on that node. You can enter a font path name of up to
|
||
30 characters.
|
||
To enter a LAT font path:
|
||
1. Click on the LAT Font Path button under the Font Path Selection
|
||
title.
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 7
|
||
Customizing the VT1000 Terminal Manager 149
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
2. The LAT Font Path text entry field already has the word ROM entered.
|
||
Enter a comma (,) followed by a font host name and two colons.
|
||
Example:
|
||
|
||
ROM,ALPHA::
|
||
ALPHA:: is the font server name. It can be a node name or a cluster
|
||
name. You must leave ROM at the beginning of the line, followed by a
|
||
comma, the font server name, and the two colons.
|
||
No further specification is needed, unless the system manager moves the
|
||
fonts out of the default directory created when the windows software and
|
||
fonts were installed on the system.
|
||
Setting a LAT font path may take several minutes. The terminal must
|
||
wait for the font service to become known. Each time you power up the
|
||
terminal or restart it by choosing Quit, the terminal immediately tries to
|
||
set the font path that was saved. If the font service is not immediately
|
||
known, the terminal tries every 30 seconds to set the font path, for up to
|
||
2.5 minutes. The LAT default multicast interval is 2 minutes.
|
||
When the font service is known, the process of setting the path starts on
|
||
the next retry. If the font setting does not restart after 2.5 minutes, or if
|
||
the service becomes known between retries, you can restart it by clicking
|
||
on Okay in the Customize Font Path dialog box.
|
||
When the font service is known, setting the LAT set font path takes less
|
||
than a minute. The message Font Path Succeeded is displayed in the
|
||
VT1000 Terminal Manager window’s Messages region, along with a report
|
||
of the number of fonts found.
|
||
|
||
TFTP Font Path
|
||
Before you enter a font path, the terminal uses only its own fonts stored
|
||
in ROM. The first entry in the TFTP Font Path field is ROM, indicating
|
||
the terminal is using its own fonts. Always leave the ROM entry at the
|
||
beginning of the field.
|
||
If you enter a font path pointing to a node on your system, the terminal
|
||
uses the font files on that node. You can enter a font path name of up to
|
||
30 characters.
|
||
To enter a TFTP font path:
|
||
1. Click on the TFTP Font Path button under the Font Path Selection
|
||
title.
|
||
2. Click on the TFTP Font Path text entry field.
|
||
|
||
Chapter 7
|
||
150 Customizing the VT1000 Terminal Manager
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
3. The word ROM is already entered in the TFTP Font Path text entry
|
||
field. Use your keyboard to enter a comma (,) followed by a font host
|
||
IP address. Use the syntax IP_address::path_name. See your system
|
||
manager if you need help.
|
||
Example:
|
||
ROM,123.45.67.89:/vt1000/100dpi/fonts.dir
|
||
The exact format depends on how your system manager defines the font
|
||
path. See Appendix D for details.
|
||
Each time you power up the terminal or reset it by using a quit function,
|
||
the terminal tries to set a font path. The terminal must wait for the font
|
||
service to become known before it begins to set the path. While setting
|
||
the path, the terminal displays a clock cursor. All other terminal activity
|
||
halts until the path is set.
|
||
|
||
Tips on Setting Font Paths
|
||
The time needed to set a font path depends on how many fonts are in the
|
||
font path. To lessen the time to set a font path:
|
||
• Point only to the font files that support the resolution of your monitor.
|
||
• In a mixed LAT and TCP/IP environment, use a LAT system for the
|
||
font service.
|
||
• In a non-DECwindows environment, point only to the files needed for
|
||
your application.
|
||
System managers should see Appendix D for instructions on creating
|
||
files and configuring systems for font paths. Note that the font path in
|
||
the previous example is based on a restricted TFTP setup in the system
|
||
configuration file.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 7
|
||
88
|
||
The Keyboard
|
||
|
||
|
||
This chapter describes the basic function of each keyboard key and
|
||
indicator. Chapter 9 describes how to type additional characters not
|
||
shown on the keys.
|
||
|
||
LK401 Keyboard
|
||
The VT1000 terminal uses Digital’s LK401 keyboard. The LK401
|
||
keyboard comes in many versions for use with different languages and
|
||
dialects. The only physical difference between these keyboards are the
|
||
legends on the keys.
|
||
The figures in this chapter show the North American/United Kingdom
|
||
keyboard, unless otherwise noted.
|
||
|
||
Keyboard Dialect
|
||
The VT1000 is initially set to work with the North American/United
|
||
Kingdom keyboard. If you have a keyboard for a different language or
|
||
you want to use the British dialect, you must change the Keyboard
|
||
Type setting in the Customize Keyboard dialog box. See ‘‘Changing Your
|
||
Keyboard Settings’’ in Chapter 7.
|
||
|
||
Layout
|
||
The LK401 keyboard has four groups of keys and two visual indicators.
|
||
The keys are grouped by function.
|
||
Main keypad
|
||
Editing keypad
|
||
Numeric keypad
|
||
Top-row function keys
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 8 151
|
||
152 The Keyboard
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
The LK401 keyboard also has two audible indicators, a keyclick and bell.
|
||
|
||
|
||
Top-Row Function Keys
|
||
|
||
Visual Indicators
|
||
|
||
di gi tal
|
||
|
||
|
||
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 F11 F12 F13 F14 Help Do F17 F18 F19 F20
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Hold Print Break F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 (ESC) (BS) (LF) F14 F17 F18 F19 F20
|
||
|
||
|
||
_
|
||
~ ! a # $ % ^ & * ( ) + X Insert Re- PF1 PF2 PF3 PF4
|
||
|
||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 - =
|
||
Find
|
||
Here move
|
||
|
||
Tab Return
|
||
7 8 9 _
|
||
Q W E R T Y U I O P } } Select Prev Next
|
||
] ]
|
||
|
||
: 4 5 ,
|
||
Ctrl
|
||
A S D F G H J K L " 6
|
||
; ’ \
|
||
Shift
|
||
> Z X C V B N M < > ? Shift
|
||
1 2 3 Enter
|
||
|
||
< , . /
|
||
Compose Alt Alt Compose
|
||
0 .
|
||
Character Function Function Character
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Main Keypad Editing Numeric
|
||
Keypad Keypad
|
||
|
||
GSF_1436_89.DG
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Main Keypad
|
||
The main keypad is similar to a typewriter keyboard with alphanumeric
|
||
characters, punctuation marks, and Shift keys. The main keypad also has
|
||
a number of keys not found on a standard typewriter, such as the Ctrl
|
||
modifier key and the Compose Character and Alt Function prefix keys. The
|
||
German keyboard has a Group Shift key and Alternate Shift key instead of
|
||
Compose Character keys.
|
||
|
||
Modifier keys are pressed in combination with another key, to modify the
|
||
code sent by that key. Prefix keys are pressed and released before pressing
|
||
another key, to change the function of one or more keystrokes.
|
||
|
||
Special-Function Keys
|
||
The main keypad has the following special-function keys:
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 8
|
||
The Keyboard 153
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Tab Pressing Tab in a VTE sends a horizontal tab, which
|
||
normally moves the cursor to the next tab stop.
|
||
Applications can change tab stops. In the VT1000
|
||
Terminal Manager screens and in some DECwindows
|
||
menus, Tab moves the cursor to the next text entry field.
|
||
Ctrl Holding down Ctrl and pressing another key sends a
|
||
control code to the host.
|
||
For example, Ctrl Z means to hold down Ctrl and press
|
||
the Z key.
|
||
Shift There are left and right Shift keys. Holding down Shift
|
||
and pressing a standard key sends the shifted (top)
|
||
character on the key.
|
||
Holding down Shift and pressing a special-function key
|
||
starts a predefined control function. For example, Shift
|
||
F2 (Print) means to hold down Shift while pressing the F2
|
||
(Print) key.
|
||
Pressing the lock key down puts the keyboard in caps
|
||
lock mode or shift lock mode. You can set the mode from
|
||
the Customize Keyboard dialog box (Chapter 7). The
|
||
default setting is Caps Lock.
|
||
• In caps lock mode, the alphabetic keys send their
|
||
uppercase or shifted character when pressed alone.
|
||
You can use a Shift key to send the shifted character
|
||
on other keys. You turn caps lock mode on and off by
|
||
pressing and releasing the lock key.
|
||
• In shift lock mode, all keys on the main keypad send
|
||
their shifted character. You can turn shift lock mode
|
||
on or off by pressing the Lock key.
|
||
When the lock key is down, the lock indicator on the
|
||
keyboard turns on.
|
||
Return Pressing Return sends either a carriage return or a
|
||
carriage return and a line feed (newline). You can
|
||
select the function of the Return key from the Customize
|
||
General dialog box (Chapter 5).
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 8
|
||
154 The Keyboard
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
<x Pressing the < x key normally sends a delete (DEL)
|
||
Backarrow character. Many applications use DEL to erase one
|
||
key character to the left of the cursor.
|
||
You can make the < x key send a backspace (BS)
|
||
character instead of DEL. You can select the function
|
||
of the < x key from the Customize VTE Keyboard dialog
|
||
box (Chapter 5).
|
||
Space bar Pressing the space bar sends a space (SP) character. You
|
||
use spaces to separate words or move the cursor forward.
|
||
These are prefix keys, used to generate characters that
|
||
do not appear as standard keys on your keyboard. See
|
||
Compose Chapter 9.
|
||
Character
|
||
(left and On the German keyboard, the Compose Character key is
|
||
right) replaced by Group Shift and Alternate Shift.
|
||
You use Group Shift as a prefix or modifier key, to type the
|
||
characters on the right half of keycaps. See Chapter 9.
|
||
Group
|
||
Shift Alternate Shift is a modifier key, used to generate a no
|
||
Alternate break space (NBSP) or soft hyphen (SHY) character.
|
||
Shift
|
||
(German) Alternate Shift + space bar = NBSP character.
|
||
Alternate Shift + - = SHY character.
|
||
You use Alt Function with other keys, to select alternate
|
||
functions defined by your application software.
|
||
Alt
|
||
Function You can use Alt Function as a Compose Character key, by
|
||
(left and holding down the space bar and pressing Alt Function .
|
||
right) This action starts a compose character sequence.
|
||
For example, Digital’s workstations use the LK201
|
||
keyboard, which has a Compose key. The VT1000 uses
|
||
the LK401 keyboard, which has both Compose Character
|
||
and Alt Function keys. If a workstation application’s
|
||
documentation specifies use of the Compose Character
|
||
key as a modifier for keyboard keys or mouse buttons,
|
||
you may need to use the Alt Function key instead on the
|
||
VT1000.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 8
|
||
The Keyboard 155
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Editing Keypad
|
||
The editing keypad has four arrow keys and six editing keys.
|
||
Pressing an arrow key normally moves the text cursor in the direction of
|
||
the arrow. For example, pressing the key moves the cursor down one
|
||
line.
|
||
If you press Ctrl F3 , you can use the editing keypad to perform some
|
||
mouse functions. In this mode, the arrow keys move the mouse pointer.
|
||
The Select , Prev , Next keys correspond to the three mouse buttons. The
|
||
mouse continues to operate. There is no indication the mode is on, but
|
||
the arrow keys will not work for normal editing functions.
|
||
To turn this mode off, press Ctrl F3 again.
|
||
The six editing keys generally perform screen control functions defined by
|
||
application software.
|
||
|
||
Numeric Keypad
|
||
Numeric keypad keys often have functions assigned by your software
|
||
applications, especially PF1 to PF4 . For example, you may use a
|
||
spreadsheet program that assigns special functions to these keys. See
|
||
your application manuals for details.
|
||
You can use the numeric keypad to enter numeric data as you would
|
||
with a calculator. Programmers can use this keypad to do hexadecimal
|
||
compose sequences. See ‘‘Hexadecimal Key Sequences’’ at the end of
|
||
Chapter 9.
|
||
When you use video terminal (VTE) windows, you can set the function of
|
||
the keypad as a numeric keypad or application keypad. See the Customize
|
||
General dialog box in Chapter 5.
|
||
|
||
Enter The Enter key on the numeric keypad normally works
|
||
like the Return key. Enter sends a carriage return, or
|
||
a carriage return and a line feed. You can select the
|
||
function of the Return key from the Customize General
|
||
dialog box (Chapter 5).
|
||
Application software may use Enter as a special-
|
||
function key.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 8
|
||
156 The Keyboard
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Top-Row Function Keys
|
||
Predefined Keys
|
||
The first five top-row keys, F1 to F5 , are predefined to perform the
|
||
following functions. You cannot change these functions. Your application
|
||
software defines the functions of the remaining top-row keys. See your
|
||
application manual for details.
|
||
F1 (Hold) Pressing F1 (Hold) puts the screen display in the active
|
||
window on hold. This stops the scrolling of text, which can
|
||
make reading easier. When you press F1 (Hold), the hold
|
||
indicator on the keyboard turns on. Pressing F1 (Hold)
|
||
again allows scrolling to resume.
|
||
F2 (Print) Pressing F2 (Print) sends the text in the active window to
|
||
the printer.
|
||
The output may or may not correspond exactly to the
|
||
display in the window. The output depends on the window
|
||
size and font size. See Chapter 5 for more information on
|
||
printing.
|
||
Ctrl F2 Pressing Ctrl F2 (Print) turns auto print mode on or off. In
|
||
auto print mode, you can automatically print each line of
|
||
text as it is received from the host system.
|
||
F3 This key is disabled.
|
||
Ctrl F3 Pressing Ctrl F3 lets you use the editing keypad to perform
|
||
some mouse functions. In this mode, the arrow keys
|
||
move the mouse pointer. The Select , Prev , and Next
|
||
keys correspond to the three mouse buttons. The mouse
|
||
continues to operate. There is no indication the mode is
|
||
on, but the arrow keys will not work for normal editing
|
||
functions.
|
||
To turn this mode off, press Ctrl F3 again.
|
||
F4 This key is disabled.
|
||
F5 (Break) Pressing Break ends communication with your system
|
||
if you are using a VTE window running over the serial
|
||
communication line.
|
||
Pressing F5 (Break) has no effect on LAT or TCP/IP
|
||
connections.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 8
|
||
The Keyboard 157
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Shift F5 Pressing Shift F5 (Break) performs a disconnect on
|
||
the serial communications port associated with the
|
||
current session. A disconnect is normally used to end
|
||
communication with a modem in preparation for another
|
||
call.
|
||
Ctrl F5 Pressing Ctrl F5 (Break) sends the answerback message
|
||
to the system, regardless of the communications channel
|
||
used.
|
||
|
||
NOTE
|
||
Ctrl F5 (Break) sends the answerback message even
|
||
if you set the Conceal Answerback Message in the
|
||
Customize General dialog box (Chapter 5).
|
||
|
||
User-Defined Keys and Application-Specific Keys
|
||
The function of the remaining top-row keys, F6 to F20 , often depends on
|
||
your application software. Refer to your application software manuals for
|
||
a description of key functions. You can also define the function of these
|
||
keys yourself.
|
||
F6 to F20 When pressed alone, these keys send predefined
|
||
programming sequences to the host system (Chapter 10).
|
||
Applications that recognize these sequences can use the
|
||
keys to perform various functions.
|
||
In VT100 and VT52 modes
|
||
Keys F11 , F12 , and F13 send control characters ESC, BS,
|
||
and LF respectively. Keys F6 to F10 and F14 to F20 do not
|
||
function.
|
||
Shift F6 User-defined keys (UDKs)
|
||
to Pressing Shift and one of these keys sends the user-defined
|
||
Shift 20 function for that key. You can define keys F6 to F20 by
|
||
using programming sequences. You can use any sequence
|
||
of characters in your definitions. Definitions are loaded
|
||
from the host system. See the Chapter 10 for details.
|
||
|
||
Data Processing Keys
|
||
Most versions of the LK401 keyboard have some keys with characters
|
||
on the left half and right half of their keycap. Normally, you use the
|
||
characters on the left half of the key. These are called typewriter
|
||
characters. The characters on the right half are for data processing
|
||
use.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 8
|
||
158 The Keyboard
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
You can set these keys to send their typewriter or data processing
|
||
characters, by choosing the keyboard mode. See ‘‘Changing Your Keyboard
|
||
Settings’’ in Chapter 7.
|
||
For the following keyboard types, the typewriter and data processing
|
||
settings are identical:
|
||
• North American and Dutch
|
||
• When using 8-bit multinational characters: British, German, and
|
||
Portuguese
|
||
If you use 7-bit national replacement character sets (NRCs), make
|
||
sure you have chosen the correct NRC to match your keyboard. All
|
||
data processing keyboards, regardless of language, expect the US
|
||
ASCII character set to be chosen. See ‘‘Choosing National Replacement
|
||
Character Sets’’ in Chapter 5.
|
||
|
||
# £ Key
|
||
|
||
The North American/United Kingdom standard keyboard has only one
|
||
key with three characters.
|
||
To use the £ symbol, you choose the British Keyboard type. To use the
|
||
# symbol, you choose the North American Keyboard type . There are no
|
||
separate data processing legends on the North American/United Kingdom
|
||
keyboard.
|
||
|
||
Compose Characters
|
||
You can type compose sequences to display many more characters than
|
||
those shown on the keycaps. For example, you can display accented
|
||
letters. Chapter 9 describes how to use compose sequences.
|
||
|
||
Indicator Lights
|
||
The keyboard has two indicator lights that work with the F1 (Hold) and
|
||
lock keys. The indicator lights are at the upper-left of the keyboard.
|
||
|
||
Turns on or off when you press the F1 (Hold) key.
|
||
|
||
|
||
Turns on or off when you press the lock key.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 8
|
||
The Keyboard 159
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Audible Indicators
|
||
The keyboard has two audible indicators, a keyclick and a bell. You can
|
||
use the bell as a margin bell, warning bell, or both. You can turn off the
|
||
keyclick and bell, or adjust their volume. See the Customize Keyboard
|
||
dialog box (Chapter 7).
|
||
|
||
Keyclick
|
||
You hear the keyclick sound each time you press a key that sends a
|
||
code or causes the terminal to take some immediate action. Shift and Ctrl
|
||
never click. If a key is autorepeating, the keyclick will repeat once for
|
||
each character or key sequence sent. You can turn off the keyclick in the
|
||
Customize Keyboard dialog box.
|
||
|
||
Bell
|
||
The bell tone is a beeping sound. You can use the bell as a margin bell,
|
||
warning bell, or both.
|
||
|
||
Margin Bell
|
||
This bell sounds when the cursor is eight characters from the right
|
||
margin.
|
||
|
||
Warning Bell
|
||
This bell sounds for any of the following conditions:
|
||
• During the power-up self-test
|
||
• When the terminal receives a bell (BEL) character from the host
|
||
system
|
||
• After a compose character error
|
||
• After pressing a key for a character that is not available in the current
|
||
character set
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 8
|
||
9 9
|
||
Typing Additional Characters
|
||
|
||
|
||
The VT1000 terminal lets you type more characters than appear on your
|
||
keyboard. For example, you can type accented characters or a © symbol.
|
||
This chapter lists the available characters and shows you how to select
|
||
them.
|
||
To enter one of these characters, you type a sequence of keys. Most
|
||
sequences begin with one of the Compose Character keys. If you
|
||
use the German keyboard, you use the Group Shift key instead of
|
||
Compose Character .
|
||
|
||
This chapter describes the following types of key sequences:
|
||
• Three-stroke Compose Character sequences (with all LK401 keyboards)
|
||
• Group Shift sequences (with the German keyboard)
|
||
• Two-stroke key sequences (with keyboards that have nonspacing
|
||
diacritical keys)
|
||
• Hexadecimal key sequences (for programmers)
|
||
Two basic factors determine the key sequences you can use.
|
||
• The Keyboard Type and Keyboard Mode settings, which should match
|
||
your keyboard type (Chapter 7).
|
||
• The character set the terminal is currently using (Chapter 5).
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
160 Chapter 9
|
||
Typing Additional Characters 161
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
What Characters Can I Type?
|
||
You can type any of the characters in the character set the terminal
|
||
is currently using. You can select from two multinational sets (DEC
|
||
Multinational or ISO Latin Alphabet No. 1) or many national replacement
|
||
character sets (NRCs). The Customize VTE General dialog box lets you
|
||
set the terminal to work with 8-bit multinational sets or 7-bit NRC sets.
|
||
If you choose 7-bit NRC sets, the Customize VTE 7-Bit NRCS Selection
|
||
dialog box (Chapter 5) lets you choose a specific NRC set.
|
||
By default, the terminal uses the DEC Multinational character set.
|
||
Chapter 5 describes multinational and national character sets.
|
||
|
||
Key Sequences with Nonspacing Diacritical Keys
|
||
Table 9–1 lists the keyboards that have keys with diacritical marks.
|
||
Table 9–2 lists all the additional characters for all character sets in
|
||
the terminal. Many of these characters include a diacritical mark. For
|
||
example, Á includes an acute accent.
|
||
To enter a character that has a diacritical mark, you press the diacritical
|
||
key followed by the character. If your keyboard does not have the
|
||
diacritical key, you must press the Compose Character key followed by
|
||
the correct key sequence listed in Table 9–2.
|
||
To use diacritical keys, you must be using a multinational character set.
|
||
|
||
Table 9–1 Keyboards with Diacritical Marks
|
||
Grave Acute Circumflex Tilde
|
||
Keyboard Accent Accent Accent Mark Umlaut
|
||
|
||
Finnish yes no yes yes no
|
||
Flemish yes no yes yes yes
|
||
French/Belgian yes no yes yes yes
|
||
French yes no yes yes no
|
||
Canadian
|
||
German yes yes yes yes yes
|
||
Portuguese no no no yes no
|
||
Spanish yes yes yes yes yes
|
||
Swedish yes no yes yes no
|
||
Swiss (French) yes no yes yes yes
|
||
Swiss (German) yes no yes yes yes
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 9
|
||
162 Typing Additional Characters
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
How to Type a Character Using the Compose
|
||
Character Key
|
||
To enter a Compose Character key sequence:
|
||
1. Find the character you want to type in Table 9–2.
|
||
2. Press the Compose Character key.
|
||
3. Type the sequence in Table 9–2 for the character you want.
|
||
|
||
Example
|
||
To type an é:
|
||
1. Find the é character in Table 9–2.
|
||
2. Press Compose Character .
|
||
3. Type e and ’ (apostrophe).
|
||
|
||
NOTE
|
||
If you try to enter a character that is not available in the current
|
||
character set, a warning bell sounds. See ‘‘Invalid Sequences’’ in
|
||
this chapter.
|
||
|
||
How to Type a Character Using the Group Shift Key
|
||
If you select the Austrian-German keyboard type in the Customize
|
||
Keyboard dialog box (Chapter 7), the Group Shift key replaces the
|
||
Compose Character key.
|
||
|
||
Many keys on the German keyboard have a second group of legends on
|
||
the right half of their keycap. These legends are called Group-2.
|
||
To enter a single character from Group-2:
|
||
1. Press and release the Group Shift key.
|
||
2. Type the key that has the desired character on the right half of the
|
||
keycap. The character appears on the screen.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 9
|
||
Typing Additional Characters 163
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Example
|
||
To type an ø:
|
||
1. Press Group Shift .
|
||
|
||
2. Type the key that has the ø character on the right half of the keycap:
|
||
O ø.
|
||
|
||
To enter a series of characters from Group-2:
|
||
1. Hold down the Group Shift key.
|
||
2. Type the series of keys that have the desired characters on the right
|
||
half of their keycaps. The characters appear on the screen.
|
||
3. When you are done typing characters from Group-2, release the
|
||
Group-Shift key.
|
||
|
||
|
||
Invalid Sequences
|
||
When you complete a valid compose or group-shift sequence, the character
|
||
appears on the screen. If you use an invalid sequence, the terminal
|
||
cancels the sequence and sounds the warning bell.
|
||
Some compose characters require that you type the key sequence in the
|
||
order listed in Table 9–2. If you do not follow the order, the sequence is
|
||
invalid and the warning bell sounds. If the terminal does not display the
|
||
character, repeat the sequence exactly as shown in Table 9–2.
|
||
|
||
NOTE
|
||
Pressing a function key cancels a compose or group-shift sequence
|
||
without sounding the bell.
|
||
You can turn the warning bell on or off from the Customize
|
||
Keyboard dialog box (Chapter 7).
|
||
|
||
Canceling or Restarting a Key Sequence
|
||
If you accidentally start a key sequence by pressing Compose Character ,
|
||
Group Shift , or a nonspacing diacritical key, press the <x key. This
|
||
immediately cancels the sequence.
|
||
If you press Compose Character during a compose sequence, a new three-
|
||
stroke sequence starts from that point. The first sequence is canceled.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 9
|
||
164 Typing Additional Characters
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
If you press any of the following keys during a key sequence, they cancel
|
||
the sequence and perform their usual function:
|
||
Tab Any top-row key
|
||
Enter Any Ctrl other key combination
|
||
|
||
|
||
Hexadecimal Key Sequences
|
||
This feature is primarily for programmers who are familiar with character
|
||
coding and hexadecimal representation.
|
||
The terminal uses coded character sets to exchange data with a host
|
||
computer. The code for a character can be represented by a pair of
|
||
hexadecimal digits. With the VT1000, you can enter any 8-bit code by
|
||
pressing Compose Character or Group Shift followed by two hexadecimal
|
||
digits typed on the numeric keypad.
|
||
When you press Compose Character or Group Shift , the terminal assigns
|
||
hexadecimal values to the numeric keypad keys. The character set tables
|
||
in Chapter 10 show you the hexadecimal values for each character in the
|
||
standard character sets. Here are the values assigned to each key:
|
||
|
||
Hexadecimal Compose Keys
|
||
|
||
|
||
PF1 PF2 PF3 PF4
|
||
Key Name Hexadecimal Digit
|
||
|
||
|
||
7 8 9 _ PF1 A
|
||
|
||
PF2 B
|
||
|
||
|
||
4 5 , PF3 C
|
||
6
|
||
PF4 D
|
||
|
||
1 2 3 Enter Minus E
|
||
|
||
Comma F
|
||
|
||
0 .
|
||
|
||
|
||
GSF_0643_89.DG
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 9
|
||
Typing Additional Characters 165
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
NOTE
|
||
The 8-Bit Characters, 7-Bit Characters, and UPSS DEC
|
||
Supplemental buttons in the Customize VTE General dialog box
|
||
do not affect hexadecimal compose sequences.
|
||
|
||
Examples
|
||
• You can use a hexadecimal compose sequence to send the US (unit
|
||
separator) control character. The hexadecimal value for US is 1F.
|
||
1. Press Compose Character or Group Shift .
|
||
|
||
2. Press 1 on the numeric keypad.
|
||
3. Press , on the numeric keypad.
|
||
• You can use a hexadecimal compose sequence to send the DCS (device
|
||
control string) character. The hexadecimal value for DCS is 90.
|
||
1. Press Compose Character or Group Shift .
|
||
|
||
2. Press 9 on the numeric keypad.
|
||
3. Press 0 on the numeric keypad.
|
||
|
||
Invalid Hexadecimal Sequences
|
||
If you enter an invalid sequence, the terminal cancels the sequence and
|
||
sounds the warning bell. You can turn the warning bell on or off from the
|
||
Customize Keyboard dialog box (Chapter 7).
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 9
|
||
166 Typing Additional Characters
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Table 9–2 Key Sequences for Character Sequence
|
||
Additional Characters
|
||
± plus or minus +-
|
||
Character Sequence sign
|
||
" quotation mark ¨ (sp) ² superscript 2 2^
|
||
# number sign ++ ³ superscript 3 3^
|
||
’ apostrophe ´ (sp) µ micro sign /U
|
||
@ commercial at AA ¶ paragraph sign P!
|
||
[ opening bracket (( · middle dot . ^
|
||
\ backslash / / or / < ¹ superscript 1 1^
|
||
] closing bracket )) º masculine O_
|
||
ordinal
|
||
^ circumflex ^ (sp)
|
||
accent » closed angle >>
|
||
brackets
|
||
` grave accent ` (sp)
|
||
¼ fraction one- 14
|
||
{ opening brace (- quarter
|
||
| vertical line /^ ½ fraction one-half 12
|
||
} closing brace )- ¿ inverted ? ??
|
||
~ tilde ~ (sp) À A grave `A
|
||
¡ inverted ! !! Á A acute ’A
|
||
¢ cent sign C / or C | Â A circumflex ^A
|
||
£ pound sign L- or L= Ã A tilde ~A
|
||
¥ yen sign Y- or Y= Ä A umlaut ¨A or "A
|
||
§ section sign SO or S! or Å A ring °A or *A
|
||
S0
|
||
(degree
|
||
¤ currency sign XO or X0 sign)
|
||
© copyright sign CO or C0 Æ A E diphthong AE
|
||
ª feminine ordinal A_ Ç C cedilla C,
|
||
« open angle << È E grave `E
|
||
brackets
|
||
É E acute ’E
|
||
° degree sign 0^
|
||
|
||
Most sequences that include diacritical
|
||
marks can also be typed in reverse order.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 9
|
||
Typing Additional Characters 167
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Table 9–2 (Cont.) Key Sequences Character Sequence
|
||
for Additional
|
||
Characters á a acute ’a
|
||
â a circumflex ^a
|
||
ã a tilde ~a
|
||
Character Sequence
|
||
ä a umlaut ¨a or "a
|
||
Ê E circumflex ^E
|
||
å a ring °a or a*
|
||
Ë E umlaut ¨E or "E
|
||
(degree
|
||
Ì I grave `I sign)
|
||
Í I acute ’I æ a e diphthong ae
|
||
Î I circumflex ^I ç c cedilla c , (comma)
|
||
Ï I umlaut ¨I or "I è e grave `e
|
||
Ñ N tilde ~N é e acute ’e
|
||
Ò O grave `O ê e circumflex ^e
|
||
Ó O acute ’O ë e umlaut ¨e or "e
|
||
Ô O circumflex ^O ì i grave `i
|
||
Õ O tilde ~O í i acute ’i
|
||
Ö O umlaut ¨O or "O î i circumflex ^i
|
||
Œ O E diphthong OE ï i umlaut ¨i or "i
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Ø O slash o/ ñ n tilde ~n
|
||
Ù U grave `U ò o grave `o
|
||
Ú U acute ’U ó o acute ’o
|
||
Û U circumflex ^U ô o circumflex ^o
|
||
Ü U umlaut ¨U or "U õ o tilde ~o
|
||
Ÿ Y umlaut ¨Y or "Y ö o umlaut ¨o or "o
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
ß German small ss œ o e diphthong oe
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
sharp s
|
||
This character is only available when you
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
à a grave `a
|
||
use the DEC Multinational Character Set.
|
||
See the Customize VTE General dialog box
|
||
(Chapter 5).
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 9
|
||
168 Typing Additional Characters
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Table 9–2 (Cont.) Key Sequences ¾ three quarters 34
|
||
for Additional
|
||
Characters
|
||
÷ division sign -:
|
||
|
||
Character Sequence
|
||
multiplication xx
|
||
ø o slash o/ sign
|
||
ù u grave `u
|
||
ú u acute ’u Character Sequence
|
||
|
||
û u circumflex ^u ´ acute accent ’’
|
||
ü u umlaut ¨u or "u ¸ cedilla ,,
|
||
ÿ y umlaut ¨y or "y
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
¨ diaeresis ¨ (sp) or "
|
||
ISO Characters† "
|
||
|
||
no break space sp sp Ý Y acute ’Y
|
||
|
||
¦ broken vertical | | or ! ^
|
||
bar
|
||
ý y acute ’y
|
||
|
||
¬ logical not -,
|
||
Þ capital Icelandic TH
|
||
thorn
|
||
- soft (syllable) --
|
||
hyphen
|
||
þ small Icelandic th
|
||
thorn
|
||
® registered RO
|
||
trademark
|
||
Ð capital Icelandic -D
|
||
¯ macron -^ Eth
|
||
|
||
ð small Icelandic -d
|
||
Eth
|
||
|
||
|
||
This character is only available when you
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
use the DEC Multinational Character Set.
|
||
See the Customize VTE General dialog box
|
||
(Chapter 5).
|
||
†These characters are only available when
|
||
you use the ISO Latin Alphabet No. 1
|
||
character set. See the Customize VTE
|
||
General dialog box (Chapter 5).
|
||
|
||
Chapter 9
|
||
1010
|
||
VT1000 VTE Programming Summary
|
||
|
||
|
||
The VT1000 video terminal (VTE) windows emulate a VT320 text
|
||
terminal. When programming for VTE windows, you can use the
|
||
control functions and commands described in the VT320 Programmer
|
||
Reference Manual. This chapter describes additional control functions and
|
||
commands for the VT1000 terminal that you can use when programming
|
||
VTE windows. The chapter has two main sections.
|
||
• Locator Device Commands provides a detailed description of the
|
||
commands you use to program the locator device attached to the
|
||
VT1000 terminal. The locator device can be a mouse or graphics tablet.
|
||
• Programming Summary summarizes the control functions specific to
|
||
the VT1000 terminal. If you are a programmer, you can use this as a
|
||
quick-reference tool. For more background on these control functions,
|
||
see the VT320 Programmer Reference Manual.
|
||
|
||
Locator Device Commands
|
||
This section describes the commands you use to program the locator
|
||
device attached to the terminal. The locator device can be a mouse or
|
||
graphics tablet. There are four locator device commands:
|
||
• Enable filter rectangle
|
||
• Enable locator reports
|
||
• Locator report
|
||
• Select locator events
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 10 169
|
||
170 Locator Device Commands
|
||
Enable Filter Rectangle (DECEFR)
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Enable Filter Rectangle (DECEFR)
|
||
|
||
This control function defines the coordinates of a filter rectangle, then
|
||
activates it. If the terminal detects that the locator is outside the filter
|
||
rectangle, the terminal sends an outside rectangle event and disables
|
||
the rectangle. The terminal treats filter rectangles as one-shot events.
|
||
Defining a new rectangle reactivates it.
|
||
|
||
Format
|
||
CSI Pt ; Pl; Pb; Pr ’ w
|
||
9/11 3/? 3/11 ********** 2/7 7/7
|
||
|
||
Parameters
|
||
Pt
|
||
is the top border of the filter rectangle.
|
||
|
||
Pl
|
||
is the left border.
|
||
|
||
Pb
|
||
is the bottom border.
|
||
|
||
Pr
|
||
is the right border.
|
||
|
||
Description
|
||
Pt, Pl, Pb, and Pr are in coordinate units specified in the last DECEFR
|
||
sequence. The filter rectangle includes the borders. The origin of
|
||
the rectangle is the upper-left corner (Pt = 1, Pl = 1). If you omit
|
||
any parameters, they default to the current locator position. Sending
|
||
DECEFR without any parameters informs the application of any locator
|
||
movement (unfiltered movement).
|
||
You can redefine the rectangle at any time, even if it is already active.
|
||
If you define a rectangle that does not contain the locator cursor, the
|
||
terminal sends an outside rectangle report and deactivates the rectangle.
|
||
DECEFR always cancels any previous filter rectangle definition. This
|
||
action ensures that there will never be an outstanding filter rectangle
|
||
when an application enables locator reports.
|
||
|
||
Chapter 10
|
||
Locator Device Commands 171
|
||
Enable Locator Reports (DECELR)
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Enable Locator Reports (DECELR)
|
||
|
||
This control function enables or disables the sending of locator reports
|
||
from the terminal to the application. When enabled, you can program
|
||
individual locator events to send reports to the host. An event can be
|
||
(1) movement of the locator device, or (2) the pressing or releasing of a
|
||
locator button, which is called a transition.
|
||
|
||
Format
|
||
CSI Ps ; Pu ’ z
|
||
9/11 3/? 3/11 3/? 2/7 7/10
|
||
|
||
Parameters
|
||
Ps
|
||
specifies whether or not locator reports are enabled.
|
||
Ps Meaning
|
||
0 Locator reports disabled (default)
|
||
1 Locator reports enabled
|
||
2 One-shot reports (Send one report, then disable.)
|
||
|
||
Pu
|
||
specifies the coordinate units for locator reports.
|
||
Pu Coordinate Units
|
||
0 or Character cells (default)
|
||
omitted
|
||
1 Device physical pixels
|
||
2 Character cells
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 10
|
||
172 Locator Device Commands
|
||
Locator Report (DECLRP)
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Locator Report (DECLRP)
|
||
|
||
The terminal sends locator reports to the host when a locator event
|
||
occurs. A locator event can be (1) movement of the locator device, or (2)
|
||
the pressing or releasing of a locator button, which is called a transition.
|
||
When a selected trigger event occurs, such as pressing or releasing a
|
||
button, the terminal sends a locator report (DECLRP) to the host. The
|
||
locator report tells the host the current position of the locator and which
|
||
event triggered the report.
|
||
|
||
NOTE
|
||
The terminal only sends locator reports to the host when the
|
||
enable locator reports (DECELR) command is set to enabled.
|
||
|
||
Format
|
||
CSI Pe ; Pb; Pr; Pc; Pp & w
|
||
9/11 3/? 3/11 ************* 2/6 7/7
|
||
|
||
Parameters
|
||
Pe
|
||
is the event code. Pe indicates which event caused the terminal to send
|
||
this report.
|
||
Pe Meaning
|
||
0 Request. The terminal received an explicit request for a locator
|
||
report, but the locator is unavailable.
|
||
1 Request. The terminal received an explicit request for a locator
|
||
report.
|
||
2 Left button down
|
||
3 Left button up
|
||
4 Middle button down
|
||
5 Middle button up
|
||
6 Right button down
|
||
7 Right button up
|
||
8 Fourth button down
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 10
|
||
Locator Device Commands 173
|
||
Locator Report (DECLRP)
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
9 Fourth button up
|
||
10 Locator outside of filter rectangle
|
||
|
||
Pb
|
||
is the button code. This code is an ASCII decimal number from 0 to 15
|
||
that indicates which buttons are down. The state of the four buttons
|
||
on the locator correspond to the low four bits of the decimal value. For
|
||
example, 1 means the button is down.
|
||
Pb Button Down
|
||
0 No buttons down
|
||
1 Right
|
||
2 Middle
|
||
4 Left
|
||
8 Fourth
|
||
|
||
Pr
|
||
is the row coordinate of the locator position on the page. Pr is encoded as
|
||
an ASCII decimal value.
|
||
|
||
Pc
|
||
is the column coordinate of the locator position in the page. Pc is encoded
|
||
as an ASCII decimal value.
|
||
|
||
Pp
|
||
is the page number of the locator position. The VT1000 terminal does not
|
||
use Pp, because it only has one page. Pp is encoded as an ASCII decimal
|
||
value. If Pp is omitted, the terminal uses a default of 1.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 10
|
||
174 Locator Device Commands
|
||
Request Locator Position (DECRQLP)
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Request Locator Position (DECRQLP)
|
||
|
||
This control function requests a locator position report.
|
||
|
||
Format
|
||
CSI Ps ’ |
|
||
9/11 3/? 2/7 7/12
|
||
|
||
Parameters
|
||
Ps
|
||
Selects how the terminal sends the locator position report.
|
||
Ps Meaning
|
||
0 or Send a single locator position report (DECLRP).
|
||
omitted
|
||
1 Same as 0.
|
||
|
||
|
||
Description
|
||
The host can explicitly request a locator report only when enable locator
|
||
reports (DECELR) is set to enabled. The request causes the terminal to
|
||
immediately send a locator report to the host. The report has an event
|
||
code of 1, indicating the last locator position. If the session receiving the
|
||
request is not currently active, the terminal sends the last known locator
|
||
position for that session. If the locator is disabled or unavailable, the
|
||
report has an event code of 0.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 10
|
||
Locator Device Commands 175
|
||
Select Locator Events (DECSLE)
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Select Locator Events (DECSLE)
|
||
|
||
This control function selects which locator events cause the terminal to
|
||
send a report to the host.
|
||
|
||
Format
|
||
CSI Ps . . . Ps ’ {
|
||
9/11 ********** 2/7 7/11
|
||
|
||
Parameters
|
||
Ps...Ps
|
||
are one or more parameters that select which locator events cause the
|
||
terminal to send a report.
|
||
Ps Meaning
|
||
0 Respond only to explicit host requests. (default)
|
||
Also cancels any pending filter rectangle.
|
||
1 Send a report when locator buttons are pressed.
|
||
2 Do not send a report when locator buttons are pressed.
|
||
3 Send a report when locator buttons are released.
|
||
4 Do not send a report when locator buttons are released.
|
||
|
||
|
||
Description
|
||
DECSLE lets you select which locator events the terminal reports to the
|
||
host. The locator can report both up and down (released and pressed)
|
||
button transitions for those situations where the exact sequence of button
|
||
actions is significant.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 10
|
||
176 VT1000 VTE Programming Summary
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Programming Summary
|
||
The VT320 Programmer Reference Manual describes most of the control
|
||
functions you can use when programming the VT1000 terminal in video
|
||
terminal extended (VTE) mode. This section summarizes other control
|
||
function information that is either specific to the VT1000 terminal or not
|
||
used with the VT320 terminal. Programmers can use this section as a
|
||
quick-reference tool.
|
||
The following sections are numbered to correspond to the chapters in the
|
||
VT320 Programmer Reference Manual. For example, to find out more
|
||
about Character Encoding, you would go to Chapter 2 of the VT320
|
||
Programmer Reference Manual.
|
||
|
||
2 Character Encoding
|
||
DEC Technical Character Set
|
||
The DEC Technical character set is a 7-bit character set with 94 graphic
|
||
characters. It includes characters and symbols often used in technical
|
||
applications, such as schematic and logic diagrams.
|
||
The C0 controls are in columns 0 and 1 of the DEC Technical character
|
||
set.
|
||
The graphic characters and symbols are in columns 2 through 7.
|
||
You can use the characters in positions 2/1 through 3/7 to form large
|
||
composite characters.
|
||
You can use the DEC Technical set to replace the ASCII set in GL or
|
||
the DEC Supplemental Graphic set in GR. You can only use the DEC
|
||
Technical set in VT300 mode.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 10
|
||
VT1000 VTE Programming Summary 177
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
b8 0 0 0 0 0 0
|
||
b7 0 0 1 1 1 1
|
||
b6 1 1 0 0 1 1
|
||
b5 0 1 0 1 0 1
|
||
Bits GL GR GL GR GL GR GL GR GL GR GL GR
|
||
b4 b3 b2 b1 Column 2 10 3 11 4 12 5 13 6 14 7 15
|
||
Row
|
||
Π π
|
||
60 260 100 300 120 320 140 340 160 360
|
||
0 0 0 0 0 48
|
||
30
|
||
176
|
||
B0
|
||
64
|
||
40
|
||
192
|
||
C0
|
||
80
|
||
50
|
||
208
|
||
D0
|
||
96
|
||
60
|
||
224
|
||
E0
|
||
112
|
||
70
|
||
240
|
||
F0
|
||
|
||
Ψ α ψ
|
||
41 241 61 261 101 301 121 321 141 341 161 361
|
||
0 0 0 1 1 33
|
||
21
|
||
161
|
||
A1
|
||
49
|
||
31
|
||
177
|
||
B1
|
||
65
|
||
41
|
||
193
|
||
C1
|
||
81
|
||
51
|
||
209
|
||
D1
|
||
97
|
||
61
|
||
225
|
||
E1
|
||
113
|
||
71
|
||
241
|
||
F1
|
||
|
||
β ρ
|
||
42 242 62 262 102 302 122 322 142 342 162 362
|
||
0 0 1 0 2 34
|
||
22
|
||
162
|
||
A2
|
||
50
|
||
32
|
||
178
|
||
B2
|
||
66
|
||
42
|
||
194
|
||
C2
|
||
82
|
||
52
|
||
210
|
||
D2
|
||
98
|
||
62
|
||
226
|
||
E2
|
||
114
|
||
72
|
||
242
|
||
F2
|
||
|
||
Σ χ σ
|
||
43 243 63 263 103 303 123 323 143 343 163 363
|
||
0 0 1 1 3 35
|
||
23
|
||
163
|
||
A3
|
||
51
|
||
33
|
||
179
|
||
B3
|
||
67
|
||
43
|
||
195
|
||
C3
|
||
83
|
||
53
|
||
211
|
||
D3
|
||
99
|
||
63
|
||
227
|
||
E3
|
||
115
|
||
73
|
||
243
|
||
F3
|
||
|
||
∆ δ τ
|
||
44 244 64 264 104 304 124 324 144 344 164 364
|
||
0 1 0 0 4 36
|
||
24
|
||
164
|
||
A4
|
||
52
|
||
34
|
||
180
|
||
B4
|
||
68
|
||
44
|
||
196
|
||
C4
|
||
84
|
||
54
|
||
212
|
||
D4
|
||
100
|
||
64
|
||
228
|
||
E4
|
||
116
|
||
74
|
||
244
|
||
F4
|
||
|
||
ε
|
||
45 245 65 265 105 305 125 325 145 345 165 365
|
||
0 1 0 1 5 37
|
||
25
|
||
165
|
||
A5
|
||
53
|
||
35
|
||
181
|
||
B5
|
||
∆ 69
|
||
45
|
||
197
|
||
C5
|
||
85
|
||
55
|
||
213
|
||
D5
|
||
101
|
||
65
|
||
229
|
||
E5
|
||
f 117
|
||
75
|
||
245
|
||
F5
|
||
|
||
Φ φ
|
||
46 246 66 266 106 306 126 326 146 346 166 366
|
||
0 1 1 0 6 38
|
||
26
|
||
166
|
||
A6
|
||
54
|
||
36
|
||
182
|
||
B6
|
||
70
|
||
46
|
||
198
|
||
C6
|
||
86
|
||
56
|
||
214
|
||
D6
|
||
102
|
||
66
|
||
230
|
||
E6
|
||
? 118
|
||
76
|
||
246
|
||
F6
|
||
|
||
Γ Ω γ ω
|
||
47 247 67 267 107 307 127 327 147 347 167 367
|
||
0 1 1 1 7 39
|
||
27
|
||
167
|
||
A7
|
||
55
|
||
37
|
||
183
|
||
B7
|
||
71
|
||
47
|
||
199
|
||
C7
|
||
87
|
||
57
|
||
215
|
||
D7
|
||
103
|
||
67
|
||
231
|
||
E7
|
||
119
|
||
77
|
||
247
|
||
F7
|
||
|
||
Ξ η ξ
|
||
50 250 70 270 110 310 130 330 150 350 170 370
|
||
1 0 0 0 8 40
|
||
28
|
||
168
|
||
A8
|
||
? 56
|
||
38
|
||
184
|
||
B8
|
||
72
|
||
48
|
||
200
|
||
C8
|
||
88
|
||
58
|
||
216
|
||
D8
|
||
104
|
||
68
|
||
232
|
||
E8
|
||
120
|
||
78
|
||
248
|
||
F8
|
||
|
||
Τ ι υ
|
||
51 251 71 271 111 311 131 331 151 351 171 371
|
||
1 0 0 1 9 41
|
||
29
|
||
169
|
||
A9
|
||
57
|
||
39
|
||
185
|
||
B9
|
||
73
|
||
49
|
||
201
|
||
C9
|
||
89
|
||
59
|
||
217
|
||
D9
|
||
105
|
||
69
|
||
233
|
||
E9
|
||
121
|
||
79
|
||
249
|
||
F9
|
||
|
||
Θ θ ζ
|
||
52 252 72 272 112 312 132 332 152 352 172 372
|
||
1 0 1 0 10 42 170 58 186 74 202 U 90 218 106 234 122 250
|
||
2A AA 3A BA 4A CA 5A DA 6A EA 7A FA
|
||
|
||
κ
|
||
53 253 73 273 113 313 133 333 153 353 173 373
|
||
1 0 1 1 11 43 171 59 187 75 203 U 91 219 107 235 123 251
|
||
2B AB 3B BB 4B CB 5B DB 6B EB 7B FB
|
||
|
||
Λ λ
|
||
54 254 74 274 114 314 134 334 154 354 174 374
|
||
1 1 0 0 12 44 172 60 188 76 204 U 92 220 108 236 124 252
|
||
2C AC 3C BC 4C CC 5C DC 6C EC 7C FC
|
||
55 255 75 275 115 315 135 335 155 355 175 375
|
||
1 1 0 1 13 45 173 61 189 77 205 U 93 221 109 237 125 253
|
||
2D AD 3D BD 4D CD 5D DD 6D ED 7D FD
|
||
|
||
ν
|
||
56 256 76 276 116 316 136 336 156 356 176 376
|
||
1 1 1 0 14 46
|
||
2E
|
||
174
|
||
AE
|
||
62
|
||
3E
|
||
190
|
||
BE
|
||
78
|
||
4E
|
||
206
|
||
CE
|
||
94
|
||
5E
|
||
222
|
||
DE
|
||
110
|
||
6E
|
||
238
|
||
EE
|
||
126
|
||
7E
|
||
254
|
||
FE
|
||
57 257 77 277 117 317 137 337 157 357
|
||
1 1 1 1 15 47
|
||
2F
|
||
175
|
||
AF
|
||
63
|
||
3F
|
||
191
|
||
BF
|
||
79
|
||
4F
|
||
207
|
||
CF
|
||
95
|
||
5F
|
||
223
|
||
DF
|
||
111
|
||
6F
|
||
239
|
||
EF
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Key Codes
|
||
|
||
101 301 Octal
|
||
Character 65 193 Decimal
|
||
41 C1 Hex
|
||
|
||
* Note: When Set is Mapped into GR Bit B8 is 1
|
||
GSF_0590_89A.DG
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 10
|
||
178 VT1000 VTE Programming Summary
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
5 Using Character Sets
|
||
Selecting Graphic Character Sets
|
||
1. Designate the set as G0, G1, G2, or G3.
|
||
2. Map the designated set into the in-use table.
|
||
|
||
Designating Character Sets (SCS Sequences)
|
||
You designate a hard character set as G0 through G3 by using a select
|
||
character set (SCS) escape sequence. You cannot designate a 96-character
|
||
set as G0.
|
||
Format:
|
||
ESC I1 I2 ... In F
|
||
I1 , intermediate character
|
||
Designates the character set as G0, G1, G2, or G3.
|
||
|
||
I1 Character Code Set Selection
|
||
|
||
94-Character Sets
|
||
( left parenthesis 2/8 G0 (initial setting
|
||
for GL)
|
||
) right parenthesis 2/9 G1
|
||
* asterisk 2/10 G2 (initial setting
|
||
for GR)
|
||
+ plus sign 2/11 G3
|
||
96-Character Sets
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
- hyphen 2/13 G1
|
||
. period 2/14 G2
|
||
/ slash 2/15 G3
|
||
|
||
You cannot designate a 96-character set into G0.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 10
|
||
VT1000 VTE Programming Summary 179
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
I2 ...In F, intermediate and final characters
|
||
Selects one of the standard character sets.
|
||
|
||
I2 ...In F
|
||
Character Set Characters Code
|
||
|
||
94-Character Sets
|
||
ASCII (initial G1 and G0 setting) B 4/2
|
||
DEC Supplemental Graphic (initial G2 and %5 2/5, 3/5
|
||
G3 setting)
|
||
|
||
|
||
I2 ...In F
|
||
Character Set Characters Code
|
||
|
||
DEC Special Graphic 0 3/0
|
||
DEC Technical > 3/14
|
||
User-preferred supplemental < 3/12
|
||
NRC Sets
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
ISO United Kingdom A 4/1
|
||
DEC Finnish 5 3/5
|
||
ISO French R 5/2
|
||
DEC French Canadian 9 3/9
|
||
ISO German K 4/11
|
||
ISO Italian Y 5/9
|
||
DEC Norwegian/Danish 6 3/6
|
||
ISO Norwegian/Danish ‘ 6/0
|
||
DEC Portuguese %6 2/5, 3/6
|
||
ISO Spanish Z 5/10
|
||
DEC Swedish 7 3/7
|
||
DEC Swiss = 3/13
|
||
|
||
Only one NRC set is available at a time. You must select national mode to use NRC sets.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
See ‘‘Character Set Mode (DECNRCM)’’ in the VT320 Programmer Reference Manual.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 10
|
||
180 VT1000 VTE Programming Summary
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
I2 ...In F
|
||
Character Set Characters Code
|
||
|
||
96-Character Sets
|
||
ISO Latin–1 Supplemental A 4/1
|
||
|
||
If you set a font path and use double-height or double-width characters
|
||
(ESC # 3, ESC # 4, ESC # 6) in a VTE window message, you may have
|
||
to wait a few extra seconds for the terminal to load the larger fonts from
|
||
the host the first time they are used. There is no delay if you use the
|
||
terminal’s local ROM fonts only.
|
||
|
||
11 VT1000 Reports
|
||
Sequences for VT1000 Reports
|
||
Name Mnemonic Sequence
|
||
|
||
Primary Device Attributes
|
||
|
||
Primary DA request DA CSI c or CSI 0 c
|
||
(Host to VT1000)
|
||
|
||
Primary DA response DA CSI ? Psc; Ps1; ... Psn c
|
||
|
||
(VT1000 to host) Psc = operating level.
|
||
61 = level 1 (VT100 family).
|
||
62, 63 = levels 2 and 3
|
||
(VT300 mode).
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 10
|
||
VT1000 VTE Programming Summary 181
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Name Mnemonic Sequence
|
||
|
||
Primary Device Attributes
|
||
|
||
|
||
Ps1...Psn = extensions.
|
||
1 = 132 columns.
|
||
2 = printer port.
|
||
3 = ReGIS graphics.
|
||
4 = sixel graphics.
|
||
6 = selective erase.
|
||
7 = soft character set.
|
||
8 = user-defined keys.
|
||
9 = NRC sets.
|
||
11 = 25th status line.
|
||
14 = 8-bit architecture.
|
||
15 = DEC technical set.
|
||
16 = ReGIS locator.
|
||
17 = terminal state reports.
|
||
29 = ANSI text locator.
|
||
39 = page memory extension.
|
||
See Table 10–1 for alias responses.
|
||
|
||
|
||
Secondary Device Attributes
|
||
|
||
Secondary DA request DA CSI > c or CSI > 0 c
|
||
(Host to VT1000)
|
||
|
||
Secondary DA response DA CSI > Pp; Pv; Po c
|
||
|
||
(VT1000 to host) Pp = identification code.
|
||
42 = VT1000 terminal emulator.
|
||
28 = DECterm.
|
||
24 = VT320.
|
||
Pv = firmware version.
|
||
Po = hardware options.
|
||
0 = no options.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 10
|
||
182 VT1000 VTE Programming Summary
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Table 10–1 Primary DA Alias Responses from the VT1000
|
||
Terminal Identification Sequence Meaning
|
||
|
||
VT100 DA ESC [ ? 1; 2 c VT100 terminal
|
||
VT101 DA ESC [ ? 1; 0 c VT101 terminal
|
||
VT102 DA ESC [ ? 6 c VT102 terminal
|
||
VT220 DA CSI ? 62; 1; 2; 6; 7; 8; 9 c VT220 terminal
|
||
VT320 DA CSI ? 63; 1; 2; 6; 7; 8; 9 c VT320 terminal
|
||
VT1000 DA CSI ? 63; 1; 2; 6; 8; 9; 15; 29 c VT1000 terminal
|
||
DECterm DA CSI ? 63; 1; 3; 4; 6; 7; 8; 9; DECterm emulator
|
||
15; 16; 29 c
|
||
|
||
NOTE
|
||
To change an alias response, you must use the Customize VTE General
|
||
dialog box (Chapter 5).
|
||
|
||
|
||
Table 10–2 Control Function Requests (non-VT320)
|
||
Intermediate
|
||
and
|
||
Final
|
||
Control Function Mnemonic Character(s)
|
||
|
||
Enable locator reports DECELR ’z
|
||
Enable filter rectangles DECEFR ’w
|
||
Select locator events DECSLE ’{
|
||
|
||
|
||
Device Status Reports
|
||
VTE DSR—Keyboard Language
|
||
The VTE Keyboard DSR control function (CSI ? 27; Pd n) reports the
|
||
keyboard dialect chosen in the VT1000 Terminal Manager’s Customize
|
||
Keyboard dialog box, using the same Pd parameter values listed in the
|
||
VT320 Programmer Reference Manual. Even if the keyboard map is
|
||
loaded by the remote session manager, the terminal continues to report
|
||
the locally customized value.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 10
|
||
11
|
||
11
|
||
Solving Problems and Getting Service
|
||
|
||
|
||
This chapter describes some simple operating problems you can solve
|
||
yourself. The chapter also includes sections on:
|
||
|
||
• The VT1000 power-up self-test
|
||
• Error messages
|
||
• How to get service
|
||
|
||
Operating Problems
|
||
Table 11–1 lists some possible operating problems and suggested
|
||
solutions. If you have a problem with your terminal, check this list
|
||
before calling for service. If the problem persists and you need service,
|
||
see ‘‘Digital Service’’ in this chapter.
|
||
|
||
Table 11–1 Operating Problems
|
||
Symptom Possible Cause Suggested Solution
|
||
|
||
System Box Problems
|
||
|
||
The system box fan is The power cord is not Make sure the power
|
||
off. plugged into the power cord is plugged in and
|
||
outlet. check and the power
|
||
source.
|
||
The system box’s | /O Turn the system box’s
|
||
power switch is off (O). power switch on ( | ).
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 11 183
|
||
184 Solving Problems and Getting Service
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Table 11–1 (Cont.) Operating Problems
|
||
Symptom Possible Cause Suggested Solution
|
||
|
||
Monitor Problems
|
||
|
||
When you turn the The monitor’s | /O Turn the monitor’s power
|
||
terminal on, the power switch is off (O). switch on ( | ).
|
||
monitor does not
|
||
display the VT1000 The monitor cable is not Check the monitor cable
|
||
Terminal Manager connected to the system connections.
|
||
window after 45 box.
|
||
seconds. The monitor’s Adjust the monitor’s
|
||
brightness and contrast brightness and contrast
|
||
settings are too dark to controls. See the
|
||
see the screen display. monitor’s installation
|
||
guide.
|
||
The keyboard cable is Check the keyboard cable
|
||
not connected. connections.
|
||
The monitor’s fuse is Replace the fuse.
|
||
blown.
|
||
The screen is blank, but The CRT saver feature Check if the two
|
||
the terminal is on. may be on. keyboard lights are
|
||
blinking, which may
|
||
indicate the CRT saver
|
||
is on. If the CRT saver
|
||
is on, press any key to
|
||
reactivate the screen.
|
||
The screen is distorted The monitor select Turn the monitor select
|
||
or the text font size is switch is set to the switch setting on the
|
||
too small. wrong position. back of the system box
|
||
to the correct position
|
||
(Chapter 2). Turn the
|
||
system box’s | /O power
|
||
switch off (O) and then
|
||
on ( | ).
|
||
|
||
|
||
Customize Security Password Problems
|
||
|
||
You cannot display The password for the Contact Digital Customer
|
||
Customize dialog boxes Customize Security Services to perform a
|
||
that were locked. dialog box is lost. secure reset.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 11
|
||
Solving Problems and Getting Service 185
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Table 11–1 (Cont.) Operating Problems
|
||
Symptom Possible Cause Suggested Solution
|
||
|
||
Mouse Problems
|
||
|
||
The pointer for the The cable for the Turn the system box’s
|
||
mouse or tablet does mouse or tablet is | /O power switch off
|
||
not appear on the not connected securely (O), then disconnect and
|
||
screen, or the pointer to the system box. reconnect the mouse or
|
||
does not respond to tablet cable. Turn the
|
||
the pointing device system box’s | /O power
|
||
commands. switch on ( | ).
|
||
The mouse is broken. Replace the mouse.
|
||
Until you get a new
|
||
mouse, press Ctrl F3 to
|
||
use the editing keypad to
|
||
perform mouse functions.
|
||
See Chapter 8.
|
||
|
||
|
||
Keyboard Problems
|
||
|
||
The bell tone does not The keyboard cable is Check the keyboard cable
|
||
sound when you turn not connected. connection to the system
|
||
the VT1000 on. All box.
|
||
keyboard indicator
|
||
lights are off.
|
||
Keys do not work. The F1 (Hold) key is Press the F1 (Hold) key
|
||
active. to release the screen.
|
||
|
||
|
||
Printer Problems
|
||
|
||
The printer does not The printer’s | /O power Turn the printer’s power
|
||
print. switch is off (O). switch on ( | ).
|
||
The printer cable is not Check the printer cable
|
||
connected securely. connections.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 11
|
||
186 Solving Problems and Getting Service
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Table 11–1 (Cont.) Operating Problems
|
||
Printer Problems
|
||
|
||
The communication Make sure the
|
||
settings on the terminal communication settings
|
||
and printer do not (baud rate and parity)
|
||
match. on the terminal and
|
||
printer match. Choose
|
||
the Printer Port... menu
|
||
item from the VT1000
|
||
Terminal Manager’s
|
||
Customize Menu
|
||
(Chapter 7.)
|
||
|
||
|
||
Network Problems
|
||
|
||
The host system The ThinWire Ethernet Check the Ethernet
|
||
and terminal do not cable is not connected cable and T-connector
|
||
communicate. securely to the system connections.
|
||
box.
|
||
There is no T-connector Check that there is a
|
||
between the connector T-connector between
|
||
on the ThinWire cable the connector on the
|
||
and the system box. ThinWire cable and the
|
||
system box.
|
||
There is a ThinWire Check that there is
|
||
segment between the no ThinWire segment
|
||
system box and the between the system box
|
||
T-connector. and the T-connector.
|
||
(The T-connector must
|
||
attach directly to the
|
||
system box).
|
||
A T-connector with a Check if a terminator
|
||
terminator has been has been removed or
|
||
disconnected from an disconnected from an
|
||
operating ThinWire active ThinWire segment.
|
||
Ethernet segment.
|
||
The system box port is Make sure the port that
|
||
inactive. your system cable is
|
||
connected to is active.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 11
|
||
Solving Problems and Getting Service 187
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Power-Up Self-Test
|
||
Every time your turn the terminal on, the VT1000 automatically runs a
|
||
power-up self-test. This test checks the operating status of many internal
|
||
parts in the terminal. During the test, the keyboard lights turn on and
|
||
off. The power-up self-test should not take more than 45 seconds to
|
||
complete.
|
||
If the test is successful, the bell tone sounds and the terminal displays
|
||
the VT1000 Terminal Manager window.
|
||
If there were any test errors:
|
||
• A diagnostic message appears.
|
||
• The keyboard lights flash.
|
||
• The keyboard bell does not sound.
|
||
|
||
Screen Error Messages
|
||
If the VT1000 fails the power-up self-test, the terminal may display one of
|
||
the error messages shown. Only qualified service personnel should try to
|
||
correct these problems. You should note any error message that appears
|
||
and call Digital Customer Services.
|
||
Internal error or CPU error - 11
|
||
External ROM error - 12
|
||
External RAM error - 13
|
||
NVR error - 14
|
||
Host port error - 15
|
||
Printer port error - 16
|
||
DUART1 timer error - 17
|
||
Keyboard port error - 18
|
||
Mouse port error - 19
|
||
DUART2 timer error - 21
|
||
Video RAM error - 22
|
||
Ethernet ROM error - 23
|
||
Ethernet port error - 24
|
||
Video error - 25
|
||
Mouse error - 26
|
||
Keyboard error - 27
|
||
Trap interrupt error - 28
|
||
Video control register error - 29
|
||
I/O data path error - 31
|
||
Illegal monitor error - 32
|
||
LANCE not reset on power up - 33
|
||
Image board error - 34
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 11
|
||
188 Solving Problems and Getting Service
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Digital Service
|
||
Digital provides a wide range of maintenance programs that cover small
|
||
systems and terminals. These include on-site, carry-in, and mail-in
|
||
maintenance services. You can use these programs to select the plan
|
||
that suits your service needs.
|
||
Digital provides on-site repair and off-site repair services.
|
||
|
||
On-Site Hardware Services
|
||
Digital offers fast, low-cost, quality maintenance performed at your site
|
||
by Digital-trained Service Specialists. There are several on-site services
|
||
available.
|
||
|
||
DECservice
|
||
DECservice provides preferred on-site service, with a guaranteed response
|
||
time when equipment is located within a specified distance of the service
|
||
facility. DECservice guarantees a continuous repair effort until service is
|
||
restored. You can choose the hours of coverage, up to 24 hours a day, 7
|
||
days a week.
|
||
|
||
Basic
|
||
Basic offers priority response during regular business hours, Monday
|
||
through Friday.
|
||
|
||
Site SERVIcenter
|
||
If you have a least 50 terminals and can provide workspace at your
|
||
site, Digital will provide an on-site technician for a predetermined,
|
||
periodic time interval. The terminals may include a variety of models
|
||
(for example, VT200s and VT300s.)
|
||
|
||
Per Call
|
||
This noncontractual offering provides on-site repair based on time and
|
||
materials. Per call service is available during regular business hours,
|
||
Monday through Friday.
|
||
|
||
DECall
|
||
DECall is similar to per call service, but has an annual retainer fee.
|
||
DECall gives you on-site service at a fixed fee per repair call.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 11
|
||
Solving Problems and Getting Service 189
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Off-Site Hardware Services
|
||
Digital also provides several options for off-site service.
|
||
|
||
Carry-in SERVIcenter
|
||
Digital SERVIcenters are located in major cities around the world. They
|
||
offer convenient, cost-effective repair service with a 48 hour turnaround
|
||
time. Both contract and per call coverage is offered.
|
||
|
||
DECmailer
|
||
This is a mail-in service for module and subassembly repairs. DECmailer
|
||
provides five day turnaround.
|
||
|
||
Software Services
|
||
DECsupport
|
||
This program provides telephone and on-site remedial support (if
|
||
required), with personalized account focus and scheduled preventive
|
||
maintenance. Software updates, new releases, and access to Digital’s
|
||
Software Information Network (DSIN) are included where available.
|
||
|
||
Basic
|
||
Basic service includes telephone support, software updates, new releases,
|
||
and access to DSIN where available.
|
||
|
||
Self-Maintenance Service
|
||
This service provides software updates and new releases.
|
||
|
||
How To Get Service
|
||
Digital has a central service center in your area to help you keep your
|
||
system running at peak efficiency. To find out more about Digital’s
|
||
hardware and software service offerings
|
||
In the United States
|
||
Call 1-800-554-3333 during regular business hours.
|
||
Outside the United States
|
||
Contact your local Digital Customer Services Office.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Chapter 11
|
||
A A
|
||
Specifications
|
||
|
||
|
||
This appendix lists the specifications for the VT1000 video terminal.
|
||
|
||
Site Planning
|
||
Weight Height Width Depth
|
||
System box 5.4 kg 60mm 394 mm 368 mm
|
||
(12 lb) (2.38 in.) (15.5 in.) (14.5 in.)
|
||
VR150 monitor 16.34 kg 394 mm 403 mm 368 mm
|
||
(36 lb) (15.5 in.) (15.9 in.) (14.5 in.)
|
||
VR262 monitor 18 kg 394 mm 455 mm 391 mm
|
||
(40 lb) (15.5 in.) (17.9 in.) (15.4 in.)
|
||
VR315 monitor 13 kg 400 mm 400 mm 395 mm
|
||
(29 lb) (15.7 in.) (15.7 in.) (15.4 in.)
|
||
VR319 monitor 27.2 kg 457 mm 495 mm 452 mm
|
||
(60 lb) (18 in.) (19.5 in.) (17.8 in.)
|
||
VRE01 monitor 7.7 kg 390 mm 427 mm 70 mm
|
||
(15 lb) (15.3 in.) (16.8 in.) (2.75 in.)
|
||
LK401 keyboard 1.4 kg 45 mm 478 mm 191 mm
|
||
(3.1 lb) (1.75 in.) (18.8 in.) (7.5 in.)
|
||
Mouse Weight Height Diameter
|
||
0.17 kg 41 mm 89 mm
|
||
(0.4 lb) (1.6 in.) (3.5 in.)
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
190 Appendix A
|
||
Specifications 191
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Environment
|
||
Operating Storage
|
||
Temperature 10° to 40° C –40° to 66° C
|
||
(50° to 104° F) (–40° to 151° F)
|
||
Relative humidity 10% to 90% 0% to 95%
|
||
Maximum wet bulb 28° C (82° F)
|
||
Minimum dew point 2° C (36° F)
|
||
Maximum altitude 2.4 km (8000 ft) 9.1 km (30,000 ft)
|
||
|
||
|
||
Electrical
|
||
Line voltage (U.S.) 100 to 120 Vac nominal
|
||
88 to 132 Vrms operating range
|
||
single-phase, 3-wire
|
||
Line voltage (Europe) 220 to 240 Vac nominal
|
||
176 to 264 Vrms operating range
|
||
single phase, 3-wire
|
||
Line frequency 50 to 60 Hz
|
||
Input power 60 W maximum
|
||
Power cord Detachable, 3-conductor, grounded
|
||
Power cord receptacle EIA specified CEE22-6A
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Appendix A
|
||
192 Specifications
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Display (Monochrome Monitors)
|
||
VR150 CRT 381 mm (15 in.)
|
||
Resolution 100 dots/in.
|
||
VR262 CRT 482 mm (19 in.)
|
||
Resolution 75 dots/in.
|
||
VR315 CRT 380 mm (15 in.)
|
||
Resolution 108 dots/in.
|
||
VR319 CRT 485 mm (19 in.)
|
||
Resolution 95 dots/in.
|
||
VRE01 flat panel 482 mm (19 in.) electroluminescent screen
|
||
|
||
|
||
LK401 Keyboard
|
||
General
|
||
|
||
General 108 sculptured keys with matte finish
|
||
Available in 16 language dialects and 15 word
|
||
processing versions, including English. Three
|
||
French language keyboards.
|
||
Cord 1.8 m (6 ft) coiled cord with a 4-pin telephone-type
|
||
modular connector
|
||
Indicator lights 2 keyboard indicators:
|
||
|
||
Hold
|
||
|
||
|
||
Lock
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Keys (Approximate Size)
|
||
|
||
Home row 30 mm (1.18 in.) above desktop
|
||
Key size 13 mm (0.50 in.) square
|
||
Key spacing 19 mm (0.75 in.) center to center (for single-width
|
||
keys)
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Appendix A
|
||
Specifications 193
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Keys (Approximate Size)
|
||
|
||
Numeric keypad 18 keys
|
||
Function keys 5 predefined keys, 15 user-definable keys
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Audible Indicators If enabled . . .
|
||
|
||
Keyclick Sounds after each keystroke.
|
||
Margin bell Rings once when cursor approaches right margin.
|
||
Warning bell Rings for compose errors and system messages.
|
||
|
||
|
||
TUV Rheinland Ergonomic Approval of VT1000 Video
|
||
Terminal
|
||
The VT1000 Video Terminal with the VR262 monitor meets TUV
|
||
Ergonomic requirements. Make sure your customize default settings
|
||
are set to display the big font and light text on a dark background.
|
||
The ergonomic requirements for display work stations in the office
|
||
sector referenced in ZH 1/618 are only upheld in negative polarity (light
|
||
characters on dark background) and the big font.
|
||
Die ergonomischen Anforderungen an Bildschirmarbeitsplätze im
|
||
Bürobereich nach ZH 1/618 sind nur bei negativer Zeichendarstellung
|
||
(helle Zeichen auf dunklem Hintergrund) und großem Zeichensatz
|
||
eingehalten.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Appendix A
|
||
B B
|
||
Options and Documentation
|
||
|
||
|
||
You can order the following options, modems, cables, and manuals for
|
||
the VT1000 video terminal from Digital. See the end of this appendix for
|
||
ordering information.
|
||
|
||
Optional Memory Boards
|
||
|
||
Option Part Number Description
|
||
|
||
Memory VX10X-MA Controller board for optional RAM
|
||
controller board memory (comes with a 1 megabyte
|
||
SIMM card preinstalled)
|
||
SIMM card VX10X-MD 1 megabyte SIMM card
|
||
|
||
|
||
Modems
|
||
Part Number Description
|
||
|
||
DF224 Scholar 300, 1200, and 2400 baud, full-duplex asynchronous
|
||
Plus
|
||
DF224 300, 1200, and 2400 baud, full-duplex asynchronous
|
||
DF124 300, 600, and 1200 baud, full-duplex asynchronous
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
194 Appendix B
|
||
Options and Documentation 195
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Cables
|
||
Part Number Length Connector
|
||
|
||
Communication Cables
|
||
BC16E-10 10 ft (3 m) 6-pin M DEC-423
|
||
BC16E-25 25 ft (7.6 m) 6-pin M DEC-423
|
||
AC Power Cables Country
|
||
BN20V-2E Australia, New Zealand
|
||
BN20S-2E Austria, Belgium, Finland, France, Germany,
|
||
Netherlands, Norway, Portugal, Spain, Sweden
|
||
BN20P-2E Canada
|
||
BN20U-2E Denmark
|
||
BN20R-2E Ireland, United Kingdom
|
||
BN19U-2E Israel
|
||
BN20W-2E Italy
|
||
BN20T-2E Switzerland
|
||
|
||
|
||
Related Documentation
|
||
You can order the following related documents from Digital:
|
||
|
||
Document Order Number
|
||
|
||
VMS DECwindows User’s Guide AA-MG18A-TE
|
||
ULTRIX Workstation (UWS) User’s Guide
|
||
VT1000 Service Guide EK-V1000-PS
|
||
VT320 Programmer Reference Manual EK-VT320-RM
|
||
VR150 Pocket Service Guide EK-VR150-PS
|
||
VR262 Service Guide EK-VR262-PS
|
||
VR315 Monitor Service Guide EK-VR315-SG
|
||
VR319 Monitor Service Guide EK-VR319-SG
|
||
VRE01 Service Guide EK-VRE01-SG
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Appendix B
|
||
196 Options and Documentation
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Ordering Information
|
||
You can order modems, supplies, and documentation by phone or by mail.
|
||
|
||
Continental USA and Puerto Rico
|
||
Call 800-258-1710 or mail to:
|
||
Digital Equipment Corporation
|
||
P.O. Box CS2008
|
||
Nashua, NH 03061
|
||
|
||
New Hampshire, Alaska, and Hawaii
|
||
Call 1-603-884-6660.
|
||
|
||
Outside the USA and Puerto Rico
|
||
Mail to:
|
||
Digital Equipment Corporation
|
||
Attn: Accessories and Supplies Business Manager
|
||
c/o Local Subsidiary or Digital-Approved Distributor
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Appendix B
|
||
C
|
||
C
|
||
Communication
|
||
|
||
|
||
This appendix provides information on how the VT1000 communicates
|
||
with a host computer, printer, or modem. The appendix describes
|
||
• Network communication protocols for LAT and TCP/IP connections
|
||
• Serial communication for text terminal windows, printers, and modems
|
||
• Signals carried by the serial communication and pointing device
|
||
connectors on the back of the terminal.
|
||
The serial communication section shows the cables you can use for
|
||
different system configurations.
|
||
|
||
Network Protocols
|
||
The VT1000 can use two network communication protocols, local area
|
||
transport (LAT) and transmission control program/Internet protocol
|
||
(TCP/IP). Each protocol connects the VT1000 to a host system through
|
||
an Ethernet network.
|
||
|
||
LAT Functions
|
||
The LAT protocol connects the VT1000 terminal to VMS or ULTRIX hosts
|
||
in a local area network. The LAT protocol is Digital’s own local area
|
||
network protocol. The VT1000 complies with the architecture for LAT
|
||
Version 5.1 with extensions to define the characteristics of service classes
|
||
3 and 4.
|
||
The VT1000 supports LAT service classes 1, 3, and 4.
|
||
• Service class 1 lets the VT1000 run video terminal window (VTE)
|
||
applications through the LAT on VMS and ULTRIX systems.
|
||
• Service class 3 lets the VT1000 run X window and DECwindows
|
||
applications through the LAT on VMS systems.
|
||
|
||
Appendix C 197
|
||
198 Communication
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
• Service class 4 lets the VT1000 access font files through the LAT on
|
||
VMS systems.
|
||
|
||
TCP/IP Functions
|
||
The TCP/IP protocol connects the VT1000 terminal to ULTRIX or UNIX
|
||
hosts in a wide-area network. TCP/IP is an Internet wide-area protocol.
|
||
The VT1000 provides the following TCP/IP functions:
|
||
• Internet protocol (IP)
|
||
• Transmission control program (TCP)
|
||
• User datagram protocol (UDP)
|
||
• Boot protocol (BOOTP)
|
||
• Internet control message protocol (ICMP)
|
||
• Trivial file transfer protocol (TFTP)
|
||
• Virtual terminal connection service (TELNET)
|
||
• An Internet demon to accept in-bound X connection requests.
|
||
|
||
Serial Communication
|
||
You can connect the VT1000 to a host or terminal server with a DEC-423
|
||
6-pin cable. The terminal has two serial communication ports, DEC-423
|
||
6-pin host port and a DEC-423 6-pin printer port. You can also use the
|
||
printer port as a second host port, by changing settings in the Customize
|
||
Printer Port dialog box (Chapter 7).
|
||
The terminal operates on full-duplex asynchronous lines only, with 10
|
||
possible transmit and receive speeds. You can use split transmit and
|
||
receive speeds, but you must use the same speeds as your host system
|
||
and printer. To match the speed of your host system or local printer, use
|
||
the Customize Host Port or Customize Printer Port dialog box (Chapter 7).
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Appendix C
|
||
Communication 199
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Serial Communication Cables
|
||
You can connect the VT1000 directly to a local host system with a cable.
|
||
You can also connect the terminal indirectly to a remote host system,
|
||
using (1) a terminal server, or (2) a modem or acoustic coupler connected
|
||
to public-switched or dedicated telephone lines.
|
||
You can connect the VT1000 to an asynchronous serial printer by using a
|
||
null modem cable.
|
||
To order cables for connecting the VT1000 to a host system or printer, see
|
||
Appendix B.
|
||
|
||
Serial XON/XOFF Flow Control
|
||
The VT1000 stores incoming characters in a character input buffer. The
|
||
buffer can hold 254 characters. The terminal processes characters from
|
||
the buffer on a first-in/first-out basis.
|
||
When the input buffer fills to 64 or 128 characters, the terminal sends an
|
||
XOFF character to stop the host system from sending more characters.
|
||
The default setting is 64. You can select from three settings—64, 128,
|
||
or no XOFF—using the Customize Host Port or Customize Printer Port
|
||
dialog box (Chapter 7).
|
||
|
||
NOTE
|
||
If you select No XOFF, the terminal does not send an XOFF
|
||
character to the host system when the input buffer fills. Selecting
|
||
No XOFF also disables the F1 (Hold) key. With XOFF disabled,
|
||
there is no way to ensure that data will not be lost.
|
||
If the host system fails to respond to the XOFF character, the terminal
|
||
sends a second XOFF character when the input buffer fills to 220
|
||
characters. The terminal sends a third XOFF character when the buffer
|
||
is full.
|
||
When the input buffer falls below 32 characters, the terminal sends an
|
||
XON character to tell the host system to start sending characters again.
|
||
If you enable XON/XOFF, the terminal recognizes received XON and
|
||
XOFF characters. When the terminal receives XOFF, it stops sending
|
||
data (except XON/XOFF characters). If the keyboard data buffer
|
||
overflows, the keyboard locks. The terminal resumes transmission when
|
||
it receives an XON.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Appendix C
|
||
200 Communication
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Modems
|
||
A modem lets the VT1000 communicate over a telephone line with a
|
||
remote computer system. The modem converts the serial characters
|
||
sent between the terminal and computer into signals that can travel
|
||
over telephone lines. The modem you use with your terminal must be
|
||
compatible with the modem used by the host system.
|
||
You can use a variety of modems with your VT1000, such as Digital’s
|
||
DF224 modem. You can also use compatible modems, such as the AT&T
|
||
103, 113, and 212 types. See Appendix B for information on ordering
|
||
modems.
|
||
The VT1000 must be certified for connection to non-AT&T type modems
|
||
used outside of continental North America. Your local Digital Customer
|
||
Services office has information on terminal certification and use of non-
|
||
AT&T type modems.
|
||
To connect an approved modem to the VT1000:
|
||
1. Connect the modem cable to the 6-pin, DEC-423 host port on the rear
|
||
of the terminal.
|
||
2. Display the Customize Host Port dialog box (Chapter 7).
|
||
3. Set the transmit and receive speeds to match your modem’s speeds.
|
||
|
||
Modem Connections and Disconnections
|
||
When the VT1000 makes a connection to a host system through a modem,
|
||
the terminal performs the following operations to ensure it is ready to
|
||
send and receive:
|
||
• Unlocks the keyboard (if it was locked).
|
||
• Clears any transmisson in progress.
|
||
• Clears the keyboard buffer and all message buffers.
|
||
• Clears the input buffer.
|
||
• Clears XOFF sent and XOFF received.
|
||
Any of the following conditions will disconnect the connection to the host
|
||
system:
|
||
• You type Shift F5 (Break).
|
||
• You choose the Use Last Saved Settings or Use System Defaults menu
|
||
items from the Customize menu.
|
||
|
||
|
||
Appendix C
|
||
Communication 201
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
• The terminal loses the data set ready (DSR) signal.
|
||
• The terminal receives a self-test command from the host system.
|
||
The usual way to disconnect communications is to type Shift F5 (Break).
|
||
The host system’s response to the disconnect signal depends on the system
|
||
and the software.
|
||
|
||
Break Function
|
||
A break condition is the occurrence of a continuous space on a
|
||
communication line for greater than one character time. If you are using
|
||
a modem on a VMS operating system, this condition causes the modem to
|
||
disconnect the terminal from the host system.
|
||
The F5 (Break) key has three functions.
|
||
• If enabled, pressing F5 (Break) sends a break signal to the host. If
|
||
disabled, you can still send a break signal to the host by typing Shift F5
|
||
(Break).
|
||
• Pressing Shift F5 (Break) disconnects communications when you use a
|
||
modem.
|
||
• Pressing Ctrl F5 (Break) sends the answerback message to the host.
|
||
You enter the message by using the Customize VTE General dialog box
|
||
(Chapter 5).
|
||
|
||
Communication Connector Signals
|
||
The terminal has one DEC-423 host system (communication) connector
|
||
and one DEC-423 printer connector on the rear of the terminal. Table C–1
|
||
describes the signals for both 6-pin connectors. The following figure shows
|
||
the pin numbers for the 6-pin connectors:
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
1 2 3 4 5 6
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
GSF_1383_89.DG
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Appendix C
|
||
202 Communication
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Table C–1 6-Pin DEC-423 Communication and Printer Interface Signals
|
||
Pin Signal Mnemonic Description
|
||
|
||
1 Data DTR From VT1000
|
||
terminal When on, tells the modem or printer that
|
||
ready the VT1000 is ready to send or receive.
|
||
2 Transmit TXD+ From VT1000
|
||
data Sends serial characters. Held in the mark
|
||
state (–) when characters are not being
|
||
sent.
|
||
In modem control modes, sends data only
|
||
when DSR and DTR signals are on.
|
||
3 Transmit TXD– Provides the common ground reference
|
||
signal potential for transmitted signals TXD+
|
||
ground and DTR.
|
||
4 Receive RXD– Provides the common ground reference
|
||
signal potential for received signals RXD+ and
|
||
ground DSR.
|
||
5 Receive data RXD+ To VT1000
|
||
Receives serial characters.
|
||
6 Data set DSR To VT1000
|
||
ready From the modem: When on, tells the
|
||
VT1000 that it has a call connected.
|
||
From the printer: When on, tells the
|
||
VT1000 that the printer is ready to print.
|
||
If DSR is present at power-up, the printer
|
||
controls print operations. If DSR is not
|
||
present at power-up, the terminal checks
|
||
for DSR before each print operation.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Appendix C
|
||
Communication 203
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Pin Signals for the Pointing Device Connector
|
||
The terminal uses a 7-pin micro DIN connector for the pointing device.
|
||
Table C–2 lists the connector pin assignments.
|
||
|
||
Table C–2 Pin Assignments for the Pointing Device Connector
|
||
Pin Signal Mnemonic
|
||
|
||
1 Protective ground GND
|
||
2 Transmit data TXD
|
||
3 Receive data RXD
|
||
4 — GND/–12
|
||
5 — +5
|
||
6 Not used —
|
||
7 Not used —
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Standards
|
||
The VT1000 operates in accordance with the following national and
|
||
international communication standards:
|
||
EIA 232-D CCITT V.10
|
||
CCITT V.24 ISO 2110.2
|
||
CCITT V.28
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Appendix C
|
||
D D
|
||
System Management Tasks
|
||
|
||
|
||
This appendix describes certain tasks a system manager must perform
|
||
in the LAT and TCP/IP environments to prepare the system to support
|
||
X applications on VT1000 terminals. The appendix also describes how to
|
||
run a remote X window session on a VMS host that is not in your local
|
||
area (LAT) network.
|
||
The appendix is divided into three sections:
|
||
• LAT environment (VMS systems)
|
||
• TCP/IP environment (ULTRIX and UNIX systems)
|
||
• Running a remote X window session on a VMS system
|
||
|
||
Preparing the LAT Environment (VMS Systems)
|
||
Perform the following steps to prepare your LAT environment to support
|
||
VT1000 terminals:
|
||
• Your system startup procedures will start the LAT driver, using the
|
||
procedure LTLOAD.COM.
|
||
• Do not call DECW$STARTUP from your SYSTARTUP_V5.COM
|
||
command file. Under VMS Version 5.2 or higher, DECW$STARTUP
|
||
is called from one of the system command files and not from your
|
||
system-specific SYSTARTUP_V5.COM.
|
||
• To start DECwindows terminal support, you must include the following
|
||
logical in your system startup procedures before starting DECnet:
|
||
$ DEFINE/SYSTEM DECW$INSTALL_XTERMINAL TRUE
|
||
After the next reboot, your system will be ready to support the VT1000
|
||
terminal.
|
||
|
||
|
||
204 Appendix D
|
||
System Management Tasks 205
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
If you do not want to start DECwindows terminal support on a
|
||
particular node, you may add the following to a root-specific startup
|
||
file:
|
||
$ DEFINE/SYSTEM DECW$INSTALL_XTERMINAL FALSE
|
||
|
||
LAT Font Path
|
||
By default, the VMS font daemon expands the nodename given in the
|
||
font path to <nodename>)::DECW$XTERMINAL_FONT. This logical is
|
||
a searchlist that points to several subdirectories. To use another font
|
||
library for custom applications instead of the DECWindows fonts, use the
|
||
full directory specification in the font path field of the terminal.
|
||
|
||
Preparing the TCP/IP Environment (ULTRIX and
|
||
UNIX Systems)
|
||
Perform the following steps to prepare your TCP/IP environment to
|
||
support VT1000 terminals. These steps require Superuser privilege.
|
||
For Telnet VTE:
|
||
1. Edit /etc/inetd.conf to enable telnet.
|
||
2. Assign a network-wide IP address to the terminal.
|
||
3. Optional: Add the IP address to the network address table
|
||
/usr/etc/bootptab and edit /etc/inetd.conf to enable bootp (if
|
||
available). (Allows terminal to automatically determine its IP address
|
||
at power-up.)
|
||
For X applications:
|
||
• Perform the steps above, plus:
|
||
4. Edit /etc/inetd.conf to enable tftp.
|
||
5. Create font file directory structures.
|
||
6. Create a font directory file pointing to the fonts for your terminal’s
|
||
resolution (75 dots/inch or 100 dots/inch).
|
||
7. Enter the font path in the Customize Fonts window in the terminal.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Appendix D
|
||
206 System Management Tasks
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
1. Edit /etc/inetd.conf to enable telnet.
|
||
Edit the Internet daemon configuration file /etc/inetd.conf. The
|
||
following example is taken from the sample file that ULTRIX provides,
|
||
with most lines commented out. (This sample lists only the three lines
|
||
that are discussed in this chapter. Refer to it for bootp and tftp as well as
|
||
telnet.)
|
||
The line starting with telnet should be uncommented (delete the leading
|
||
# character) and completed, to enable VTE windows in the TCP/IP
|
||
environment. Telnet is the network terminal protocol daemon (network
|
||
listener program).
|
||
# /etc/inetd.conf (Internet daemon configuration file):
|
||
#
|
||
# @(#)inetd.conf 4.1.1.4 (ULTRIX) 4/19/88
|
||
# Internet server configuration database
|
||
#
|
||
telnet stream tcp nowait /etc/telnetd telnetd
|
||
tftp dgram udp nowait /usr/etc/tftpd tftpd -r /tftpboot
|
||
bootp dgram udp wait /usr/etc/bootpd bootpd -i
|
||
|
||
To make the /etc/inetd daemon read the edited file, use the following
|
||
command to get the processor status for inetd.
|
||
ps -lax | grep inetd
|
||
This command produces a display similar to this example:
|
||
F UID PID PPID CP PRI NI ADDR SZ RSS WCHAN STAT TT TIME COMMAND
|
||
3000001 0 150 1 0 1 0 303c 62 40 c10e8 I ? 0:26 /etc/inetd
|
||
b000001 268 3391 3383 0 1 0 4808 14 6 17518 S p2 0:00 grep inetd
|
||
|
||
The second line tells you the process ID number (PID) of the inetd
|
||
daemon, which is 150 for this example.
|
||
The next command makes /etc/inetd restart and read the
|
||
/etc/inetd.conf file to activate the edits made in the file.
|
||
|
||
kill -1 150
|
||
|
||
2. Assign an IP address.
|
||
Pick a unique number in your network address group. Enter the address
|
||
and a subnet mask value, using the terminal’s Customize TCP/IP dialog
|
||
box. Or, complete the next optional step and then click on the Determine
|
||
IP Address button in the Customize TCP/IP dialog box.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Appendix D
|
||
System Management Tasks 207
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
3. Update the network address table for the system.
|
||
If you have bootp available, individual users can have the VT1000 request
|
||
an IP address automatically at power-up, or by clicking on the Determine
|
||
IP Address button in the Customize TCP/IP dialog box. A supporting
|
||
host must be able to resolve the IP address from the hardwired Ethernet
|
||
address in the terminal.
|
||
|
||
NOTE
|
||
If bootp is enabled but a user does not want automatic start-up of
|
||
TCP/IP in the terminal at power-up, enter and save address 0.0.0.0
|
||
in the Customize TCP/IP dialog box.
|
||
You need to edit the BOOTP table file for automatic IP address
|
||
resolution. If the file does not already exist, create it with the name
|
||
/usr/etc/bootptab. This file lists each VT1000 IP address in the
|
||
following format:
|
||
name 1 Ethernet_address IP_address default_file
|
||
|
||
name Is the name used in the /etc/hosts file.
|
||
1 Signifies the base network as Ethernet.
|
||
Ethernet_address Is the terminal’s Ethernet address in hexadecimal
|
||
format: xx.xx.xx.xx.xx.xx. The Ethernet address
|
||
appears in the VT1000 Terminal Manager
|
||
window.
|
||
IP_address Is the terminal’s IP address used in the file
|
||
/etc/hosts. This address can use any valid IP
|
||
address format.
|
||
default_file Not used.
|
||
Example of a /usr/etc/bootptab file
|
||
|
||
#
|
||
# home directory
|
||
/
|
||
%%
|
||
# host htype haddr iaddr bootfile
|
||
Aleph 1 aa:00:04:00:38:de 123.45.67.81
|
||
Bet 1 08:00:ab:11:4d:28 123.45.67.82
|
||
Gimel 1 08:00:01:23:d2:b3 123.45.67.83
|
||
Dalet 1 50:12:34:56:24:74 123.45.67.84
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Appendix D
|
||
208 System Management Tasks
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
4. Edit /etc/inetd.conf to enable tftp.
|
||
Edit the Internet daemon configuration file /etc/inetd.conf.
|
||
TFTP (trivial file transfer program) is the program that transfers font
|
||
data from the font files to the terminal. Because network access to the
|
||
directories where the fonts reside can have consequences for system
|
||
security, there are at least two kinds of access privilege available. The
|
||
flexibility of the network software allows many ways to implement
|
||
each kind of access privilege, depending on the preferred operating
|
||
environment.
|
||
For unrestricted access, edit the following line in your inetd.conf file:
|
||
tftp dgram udp nowait /usr/etc/tftpd tftpd
|
||
For Restricted access, edit the following line in your inetd.conf file:
|
||
tftp dgram udp nowait /usr/etc/tftpd tftpd -r /tftpboot
|
||
This enables TFTP, the transfer protocol that allows the VT1000 to read
|
||
the font file. The -r switch sets security on the system so only files located
|
||
below the specified directory can be accessed from the network.
|
||
See step 1 for instructions to restart /etc/inetd to activate the changes
|
||
you made.
|
||
|
||
5. Create a font file directory structure.
|
||
ULTRIX workstation software ships with TFTP network access restricted
|
||
to a temporary directory that is normally empty. You can modify this
|
||
restriction to allow access only to the directory containing the font files.
|
||
However, there may be other applications and devices running on the
|
||
network that need access to other directories.
|
||
One example is the LPS20 and LPS40 series of laser printers that require
|
||
access to a supporting host to provide downloaded software. The LPS
|
||
supporting host software installation creates its own directory and sets up
|
||
TFTP to provide network access only to its directory. See ‘‘Revising the
|
||
LPS Supporting Host’’ at the end of this section for the commands to link
|
||
the LPS directory to the new directory structure.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Appendix D
|
||
System Management Tasks 209
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
To allow access only to those files that are specifically intended for the
|
||
network but are in separate directories, Digital recommends that you
|
||
create a generic network access directory (for example /tftpboot) and
|
||
then add links to the authorized directories and files. This lets you avoid
|
||
moving files around, using extra disk space, or otherwise changing the
|
||
existing product installation procedures.
|
||
|
||
NOTE
|
||
You may have to re-edit the /etc/inetd.conf file after installing
|
||
LPS supporting host software, because that installation procedure
|
||
changes the TFTP setup to be restricted to /usr/lib.
|
||
The following diagram shows the directory and link structure for
|
||
UWS version 2.2 that allows network access to all needed files. This
|
||
structure may be expanded to accommodate other products. The link (...>)
|
||
from /tftpboot to /usr/tftpboot is symbolic. The links between the
|
||
tftpboot/*.pcf files and the lib/*.pcf files and between the similar
|
||
sets of *.sys files are hard.
|
||
|
||
UWS Version 2.2 Directory Structure
|
||
|
||
/
|
||
|
|
||
---------------------------------
|
||
| |
|
||
tftpboot/ usr/
|
||
. |
|
||
. ---------------------------------
|
||
. | |
|
||
...............>tftpboot/ lib/
|
||
| |
|
||
----------------- -----------------
|
||
| | | |
|
||
vt1000/ iplps/ X11/ iplps/
|
||
| | | |
|
||
| | | |
|
||
75dpi/ sys/ fonts/ sys/
|
||
| | | |
|
||
| | | |
|
||
*.pcf *.sys decwin/ *.sys
|
||
. . | ^
|
||
. ................|................
|
||
. 75dpi/
|
||
. |
|
||
..............................> *.pcf
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Appendix D
|
||
210 System Management Tasks
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Creating a Directory Structure
|
||
To create the directory, issue the following commands on the host. (The
|
||
instructions are different for UWS Version 2.1 and Version 2.2, because
|
||
the locations and file types of the font files changed between versions.)
|
||
For UWS Version 2.1
|
||
$ cd /
|
||
$ mkdir /usr/tftpboot
|
||
$ ln -s /usr/tftpboot /tftpboot
|
||
$ cd /tftpboot
|
||
$ mkdir vt1000
|
||
$ cd /usr/lib/dwf
|
||
$ find 75dpi 100dpi -print | cpio -pvdl /tftpboot/vt1000
|
||
For UWS Version 2.2
|
||
$ cd /
|
||
$ mkdir /usr/tftpboot
|
||
$ ln -s /usr/tftpboot /tftpboot
|
||
$ cd /tftpboot
|
||
$ mkdir vt1000
|
||
$ cd /usr/lib/X11/fonts/decwin
|
||
$ find 75dpi 100dpi -print | cpio -pvdl /tftpboot/vt1000
|
||
|
||
6. Create a font path definition file.
|
||
After the links to the font files have been created, font directory files need
|
||
to be created.
|
||
To set an ULTRIX font path, the terminal looks for a font path file on
|
||
the font server host at the location specified in the Customize Font Path
|
||
dialog box. The terminal uses the contents of the font path file as a guide
|
||
to the available fonts.
|
||
The terminal accesses fonts using TFTP. Users need to specify a font path.
|
||
You need to create a file that specifies the location of each available font.
|
||
This file must have world read access.
|
||
To create a font path file for VT1000 firmware Version 2.0 or higher, issue
|
||
the following commands on the host. (See the following instructions for
|
||
Firmware Version 1.1 or higher.)
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Appendix D
|
||
System Management Tasks 211
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
For UWS Version 2.1
|
||
Change directory to /tftpboot, and list the 75 dpi font file names
|
||
into vt1000/75dpi/fonts.dir and the 100 dpi font file names into
|
||
vt1000/100dpi/fonts.dir.
|
||
$ cd /tftpboot
|
||
$ find vt1000/75dpi -name "*.dwf" -print > vt1000/75dpi/fonts.dir
|
||
$ find vt1000/100dpi -name "*.dwf" -print > vt1000/100dpi/fonts.dir
|
||
For UWS Version 2.2
|
||
Change directory to /tftpboot/vt1000/75dpi, create a font directory file, and
|
||
then do the same for 100dpi.
|
||
$ cd /tftpboot/vt1000/75dpi
|
||
$ dxmkfontdir
|
||
$ cd /tftpboot/vt1000/100dpi
|
||
$ dxmkfontdir
|
||
|
||
7. Enter a font path in the terminal.
|
||
Use one of the following font paths on your terminal:
|
||
For the VR262 or VRE01 monitors, use the 75 dots/inch fonts.
|
||
Unrestricted:
|
||
ROM,123.45.67.89:/tftpboot/vt1000/75dpi/fonts.dir
|
||
Restricted:
|
||
ROM,123.45.67.89:/vt1000/75dpi/fonts.dir
|
||
For the VR150, VR315, or VR319 monitors, use the 100 dot per inch
|
||
fonts.
|
||
Unrestricted:
|
||
ROM,123.45.67.89:/tftpboot/vt1000/100dpi/fonts.dir
|
||
Restricted:
|
||
ROM,123.45.67.89:/vt1000/100dpi/fonts.dir
|
||
|
||
NOTE
|
||
Specifying the TFTP font path in this way lets the terminal set the
|
||
font path in the least amount of time. If you only need to use one
|
||
size of fonts, Digital recommends this method.
|
||
|
||
|
||
Appendix D
|
||
212 System Management Tasks
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
For Firmware Version 1.1 or Higher,
|
||
or When Using More Than One Font Directory at a Time
|
||
Use this procedure to provide support for:
|
||
• VT1000 Firmware Version 1.1 or higher.
|
||
• Simultaneous access to more than one font directory at a time.
|
||
You must create a font.paths file to direct the terminal to the multiple
|
||
directories.
|
||
For UWS Version 2.1
|
||
• Change the directory to /tftpboot/vt1000.
|
||
• Move all the lines in the two fonts.dir files into the font.paths file.
|
||
$ cd /tftpboot/vt1000
|
||
$ cat 75dpi/fonts.dir 100dpi/fonts.dir > font.paths
|
||
For UWS Version 2.2
|
||
• Change the directory to /tftpboot/vt1000.
|
||
• Switch to the Bourne shell for the for command, if not already there.
|
||
• For both the 75dpi and 100dpi directories, copy only the lines that
|
||
contain font file names from the font.dir files and insert the directory
|
||
path in front of the font file name.
|
||
• Put the names in the font.paths file.
|
||
$ cd /tftpboot/vt1000
|
||
$ /bin/sh
|
||
$ for i in 75dpi 100dpi
|
||
> do
|
||
> grep -v ’^[0-9]*$’ $i/fonts.dir | sed "s?^?$i/?"
|
||
> done > font.paths
|
||
To access both the 75dpi and 100dpi fonts
|
||
Use the following font path on the terminal:
|
||
Unrestricted:
|
||
ROM,123.45.67.89:/tftpboot/vt1000/font.paths
|
||
Restricted:
|
||
ROM,123.45.67.89:/vt1000/font.paths
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Appendix D
|
||
System Management Tasks 213
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Revising the LPS Supporting Host
|
||
Use the following commands to set up the directory links to allow network
|
||
access to the supporting host software:
|
||
$ cd /tftpboot
|
||
$ mkdir iplps
|
||
$ cd /usr/lib/iplps
|
||
$ find sys -print | cpio -pvdl /tftpboot/iplps
|
||
The path to the LPS supporting host code remains the same as before:
|
||
12.34.56.789:/iplps/sys/*.sys
|
||
|
||
Font Server Requirement for UWS Version 2.2 RISC
|
||
You cannot use a DECstation 2100 or DECstation 3100 (RISC) machine
|
||
running software prior to UWS Version 2.2 as a font server. The fonts
|
||
native to the earlier UWS system will not work with the VT1000, and the
|
||
attempt to set a font path will fail with no error message. An ULTRIX-
|
||
32 system running UWS Version 2.1 or higher, or a VAX VMS system
|
||
running Version 5.3-1 or higher may be used as a font server for your
|
||
terminal if it is on the same Ethernet network.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Appendix D
|
||
214 System Management Tasks
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Running a Remote X Window Session on a VMS
|
||
System
|
||
This section describes how to use your VT1000 terminal to open an X
|
||
window session on one of the following:
|
||
• A host that is not in your local area (LAT) network
|
||
• A host running VMS Version 5.0–5.3
|
||
You must use DECnet to route the session through a host on your
|
||
local area network that supports the VT1000 (called LOCAL in this
|
||
example). Using a few VMS DCL commands, you can run an X window
|
||
application or DECwindows session on a remote host (called REMOTE in
|
||
this example).
|
||
The XTerminal driver allows connections to a DECwindows terminal
|
||
over DECnet by assigning a DECnet server number for the DECwindows
|
||
terminal on the supporting host. Without this, access to the DECwindows
|
||
terminal is limited to hosts running the DECwindows terminal support
|
||
package on the same Ethernet.
|
||
To use the DECnet Access Option, you must run DECW$DWT_
|
||
DECNET with DECW$DISPLAY defined as the DECwindows
|
||
terminal. DECW$DISPLAY is defined for you if you are already
|
||
running a DECwindows session, or you can define it with the SET
|
||
DISPLAY/CREATE command. Use the 12 characters of the LAT host
|
||
name in your VT1000 terminal for the node value in the example
|
||
command:
|
||
$ SET DISPLAY/CREATE/NODE=LAT_xxxxxxxxxxxx/TRANSPORT=LAT
|
||
Normally, DECW$DWT_DECNET chooses a server number for you.
|
||
However, in this release, you must define a server number. The number
|
||
is arbitrary but cannot conflict with server numbers of other users of
|
||
DECW$DWT_DECNET on your system. Each user should use a different
|
||
number. Ask your system manager to assign a number to you. Then put
|
||
the following line, with the assigned server number (100 in this example),
|
||
in your LOGIN.COM file on node LOCAL.
|
||
$ DEFINE DECW$DWT_DECNET_SERVER 100
|
||
To use the remote connection, you must provide a list on node LOCAL
|
||
of authorized remote accounts that can use the DECnet Access Option to
|
||
access your terminal. Without this list, the terminal refuses all remote
|
||
connections. Creating the list is a one-time activity, but you can update it
|
||
at any time to allow additional connections.
|
||
|
||
|
||
Appendix D
|
||
System Management Tasks 215
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
The list is in a file in DECW$USER_DEFAULTS: (normally SYS$LOGIN:)
|
||
called DECW$DWT_DECNET_AUTHORIZE.DAT. In this text file, each
|
||
line has three entries:
|
||
<transport> <remote node> <user>
|
||
For example: DECNET REMOTE USER1
|
||
Each line authorizes a single user to access the DECwindows terminal
|
||
through the DECnet Access Option. There is no limit to the number of
|
||
lines in the file.
|
||
The transport should be only DECnet.
|
||
$ CREATE DECW$USER_DEFAULTS:DECW$DWT_DECNET_AUTHORIZE.DAT
|
||
DECNET REMOTE USER1
|
||
^Z
|
||
You can execute the command interactively to start the DECnet
|
||
Access Option, or you can put the following command in your
|
||
DECW$LOGIN.COM (executed when the DECwindows Session Manager
|
||
is started). The server number is announced on SYS$OUTPUT when
|
||
DECW$DWT_DECNET is started.
|
||
$ SPAWN/NOWAIT/INPUT=NL: RUN SYS$SYSTEM:DECW$DWT_DECNET
|
||
The system replies with a message:
|
||
[Assigned DECnet server number 100 on node LOCAL]
|
||
[Remote display is server number 0 on
|
||
node LAT_xxxxxxxxxxxx using LAT transport]
|
||
You may press Return to get a system prompt, then you can log into the
|
||
remote host. Execute the following command to establish a connection
|
||
between the DECnet servers on the supporting host and the remote host.
|
||
The server number should be the predefined value from the earlier step
|
||
on the supporting host.
|
||
$ SET DISPLAY/CREATE/NODE=REMOTE/SERVER=100/TRANSPORT=DECNET
|
||
You can now start an X application on the remote host, and the
|
||
applikcation will be displayed on your VT1000.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Appendix D
|
||
Glossary
|
||
|
||
|
||
ANSI
|
||
American National Standards Institute
|
||
|
||
ASCII
|
||
American Standard Code for Information Interchange. A set of 7- or 8-bit
|
||
binary numbers representing the alphabet, punctuation, numerals, and
|
||
other special symbols used in text representation and communications
|
||
protocol.
|
||
|
||
Application
|
||
A program that performs a specific task.
|
||
|
||
CCITT
|
||
Comite Consultatif International de Telegraphique et Telephonique
|
||
(International Telegraph and Telephone Consultative Committee). A
|
||
standards committee for the communication industry in Europe.
|
||
|
||
Character set
|
||
A group of graphic characters and control characters stored as a unit in
|
||
the terminal. Graphic characters are characters you can display on the
|
||
screen. Control characters perform special functions.
|
||
|
||
Compose character
|
||
A character produced by pressing two or three keys in sequence, starting
|
||
with the Compose Character key or a diacritical mark key. You can use
|
||
compose sequences to produce characters that do not appear as standard
|
||
keys on your keyboard.
|
||
|
||
Computer system
|
||
A combination of system hardware, software, and external devices that
|
||
performs operations and tasks.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
216 Glossary
|
||
Glossary 217
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Cursor
|
||
A blinking line or block on the screen that indicates the active position.
|
||
|
||
DEC Multinational character set
|
||
The default character set for the VT1000 terminal. The DEC
|
||
Multinational set is one of two 8-bit sets built into the VT1000. The
|
||
other set is ISO Latin-1. Both 8-bit sets include the standard ASCII
|
||
character set and a supplemental set. For 7-bit environments, see
|
||
National replacement character sets.
|
||
|
||
Data processing keys
|
||
Keys that have three or four characters on the top of their keycap. The
|
||
characters on the right half of the keycap are data processing characters.
|
||
To use data processing characters, you must choose the data processing
|
||
version of your keyboard in the Customize Keyboard dialog box.
|
||
|
||
DECconnect
|
||
Digital’s cabling system for extending Ethernet and terminal
|
||
interconnections into offices and work areas.
|
||
|
||
DECnet
|
||
Digital’s networking software that runs on nodes in both local and wide
|
||
area networks.
|
||
|
||
Default option
|
||
A push button with a double outline, indicating the most frequently used
|
||
setting for a window. You can choose a default option by pressing Return
|
||
or clicking on the push button.
|
||
|
||
Default setting
|
||
A standard setting for one of the terminal’s operating features, set at the
|
||
factory. The VT1000 uses factory-default settings, unless you choose a
|
||
new setting.
|
||
|
||
Device icon
|
||
An icon on the back of the system box that identifies the device that can
|
||
be plugged into the connector.
|
||
|
||
Diacritical marks
|
||
Marks or symbols that indicate a change in the standard pronunciation of
|
||
a letter. Examples of diacritics are acute accent (’), grave accent (‘), and
|
||
tilde (~). On the VT1000, you can use diacritical marks (if available on
|
||
your keyboard) to start two-stroke compose sequences.
|
||
|
||
|
||
Glossary
|
||
218 Glossary
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Ethernet
|
||
A type of local area network, based on Carrier Sense Multiple Access
|
||
with Collision Detection (CSMA/CD). A communication concept for local
|
||
communication networks that use coaxial cable.
|
||
|
||
Filter rectangle
|
||
A bounded area used defined on the screen. To activate the filter, you
|
||
define its coordinates with a control function. If the terminal detects that
|
||
the locator is outside the filter rectangle, the terminal sends an outside
|
||
rectangle event and disables the rectangle.
|
||
|
||
Font path
|
||
A logical file that lets a device access alternate character fonts for certain
|
||
X window applications.
|
||
|
||
Full-duplex modem
|
||
A modem that can handle simultaneous, two-way communications.
|
||
|
||
Graphics
|
||
The use of lines, figures, shapes, and shaded areas to display information.
|
||
|
||
Graphics tablet
|
||
An optional device used to move the graphics input cursor on the screen
|
||
and to enter data to an application program. Most tablets have three
|
||
parts: a tablet, stylus, and puck. To move the cursor you move the puck
|
||
or stylus across the tablet. Also known as a locator device.
|
||
|
||
Group code
|
||
A number that represents a host or group of hosts on a LAT network.
|
||
|
||
Hardware
|
||
The physical equipment—mechanical and electrical—that make up a
|
||
system. Compare to Software.
|
||
|
||
Hardware Ethernet address
|
||
The unique Ethernet physical address associated with a particular
|
||
Ethernet communications controller.
|
||
|
||
Host system
|
||
A computer system that has an active connection to your terminal. The
|
||
primary or controlling computer in a multiple-computer network.
|
||
|
||
Icon
|
||
A graphic representation of an object, application, process, or window.
|
||
Glossary
|
||
Glossary 219
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Internet
|
||
A collection of networks that includes the ARPAnet, a number of local
|
||
networks at universities and research institutions, and many military
|
||
networks. See TCP/IP.
|
||
|
||
IP address
|
||
A unique network address that identifies a device on the TCP/IP network.
|
||
|
||
ISO
|
||
International Standards Organization. ISO Latin-1 is one of the two 8-bit
|
||
multinational character sets built into the VT1000. The other set is the
|
||
DEC Multinational set. For 7-bit environments, see National replacement
|
||
character sets.
|
||
|
||
Kilobyte (KB)
|
||
When referring to memory, 1024 bytes.
|
||
|
||
LAT
|
||
Local area transport. A network protocol created by Digital for local area
|
||
network communication.
|
||
|
||
LAT address
|
||
A network address that identifies the location of a device on the LAT
|
||
network.
|
||
|
||
LED
|
||
Light-emitting diode. LEDs are used as indicators on the keyboard.
|
||
|
||
Local area network (LAN)
|
||
A high-speed communications network that covers a limited geographical
|
||
area, such as a section of a building, an entire building, or a cluster of
|
||
buildings.
|
||
|
||
Locator device
|
||
See pointing device.
|
||
|
||
Megabyte (MB)
|
||
When referring to memory, 1024 kilobytes or 1,048,576 bytes.
|
||
|
||
Modem
|
||
Modulator - demodulator. A device that converts data from a computer
|
||
or terminal into signals that can be sent over a telephone line and back
|
||
again.
|
||
|
||
Glossary
|
||
220 Glossary
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Modifier key
|
||
A key pressed in combination with another key, to modify the code sent by
|
||
that key. Ctrl is a modifier key.
|
||
|
||
Monochrome monitor
|
||
A video screen that displays images in shades of one color.
|
||
|
||
Mouse
|
||
A handheld pointing device used to select menu options and draw
|
||
graphics. Moving the mouse across the desktop moves the pointer or
|
||
mouse cursor on the screen. The mouse has three buttons that serve as
|
||
function keys.
|
||
|
||
National replacement character sets (NRCs)
|
||
Seven-bit character sets for many Western European languages. Each set
|
||
has 94 characters. NRC sets are similar to the ASCII set, except for a few
|
||
characters.
|
||
|
||
Network
|
||
Two or more computers linked by communication lines to share
|
||
information or resources.
|
||
|
||
Network coordinator
|
||
The person who manages the network, assigns unique node names and
|
||
addresses for each VT1000 on the network, and provides administrative
|
||
assistance to network users.
|
||
|
||
Node
|
||
A computer, workstation, or peripheral device that is connected to a
|
||
network and can communicate with other members of the network.
|
||
|
||
Nonvolatile memory
|
||
Random access memory (RAM) that does not lose its contents when you
|
||
turn the terminal off. The VT1000 uses this memory to store your saved
|
||
customize settings.
|
||
|
||
Pixel
|
||
Picture elements. The smallest displayable unit on a video screen. To
|
||
display a character, the terminal turns on a series of pixels.
|
||
|
||
Pointing device
|
||
A mouse or a graphics tablet, used with X window applications and menus
|
||
to move the cursor on the screen. Also called a locator device.
|
||
|
||
Glossary
|
||
Glossary 221
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Port
|
||
A means for connecting one device to another. Usually, each port has an
|
||
associated connector.
|
||
|
||
Prefix key
|
||
A key that you press and release before pressing another key, to change
|
||
the function of one or more keystrokes. Compose Character is a prefix key.
|
||
|
||
Random access memory (RAM)
|
||
Memory that can be read from and written to. The VT1000 uses this
|
||
memory to store instructions of programs currently being run.
|
||
|
||
Read-only memory (ROM)
|
||
Memory that can be read from, but not modified. The VT1000 uses ROM
|
||
memory to store its operating code.
|
||
|
||
ReGIS
|
||
A serial geometric graphics display protocol created by Digital.
|
||
|
||
Scroll bar
|
||
A vertical or horizontal bar that lets you scroll information in the
|
||
associated window. The scroll bar includes stepping arrows and a slider
|
||
that let you move at various rates.
|
||
|
||
Scrolling
|
||
Moving information on the screen upward or downward to display more
|
||
data.
|
||
|
||
Server
|
||
Hardware or software that provides a specific set of services to a client.
|
||
|
||
Service
|
||
A name that represents a host or cluster of hosts that provides access to
|
||
that host or cluster.
|
||
|
||
Session
|
||
An active connection between the terminal and the host system.
|
||
|
||
Sixel
|
||
A vertical column of six pixels. Screen displays can be printed in the form
|
||
of sixel graphics.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Glossary
|
||
222 Glossary
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Slider
|
||
Part of a scroll bar that lets you scroll through information in a window.
|
||
The size of the slider indicates how much of a file is currently displayed.
|
||
The smaller the slider, the larger the file. The location of the slider in the
|
||
scroll region indicates your relative position in the file.
|
||
|
||
Software
|
||
Programs that perform a chosen or required function. Compare to
|
||
Hardware.
|
||
|
||
Stepping arrow
|
||
Part of a scroll bar that lets you move incrementally through information
|
||
in a window.
|
||
|
||
System
|
||
A combination of hardware, software, and peripheral devices that perform
|
||
specific processing operations.
|
||
|
||
System manager
|
||
A person who performs tasks necessary to operate and maintain the
|
||
system. See Network coordinator.
|
||
|
||
TCP/IP
|
||
Transmission control protocol/Internet protocol. The standard wide area
|
||
networking software for the ULTRIX and UNIX operating systems.
|
||
TCP/IP is a set of protocols developed by researchers centered around
|
||
the Advanced Research Projects Administration Network (ARPAnet).
|
||
|
||
Terminal server
|
||
An intelligent unit that can connect a number of asynchronous devices
|
||
(terminals and printers) to a host system. For example, Digital’s
|
||
DECserver 200 can link eight VT1000 terminals to a system in a local
|
||
area network (LAN), using a high-speed Ethernet cable.
|
||
|
||
Terminator
|
||
A connector used on one or both ends of an Ethernet segment that
|
||
provides the 50-ohm termination resistance needed for the cable.
|
||
|
||
ThinWire Ethernet network
|
||
A term to describe Digital’s 10base2 (IEEE standard 802.3 compliant)
|
||
Ethernet products used for local distribution of data.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Glossary
|
||
Glossary 223
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Transition
|
||
The pressing or releasing of a locator button. The terminal can report
|
||
transitions to the host system, using locator reports.
|
||
|
||
ULTRIX
|
||
A UNIX based operating system created by Digital.
|
||
|
||
UNIX
|
||
An operating system created by AT&T.
|
||
|
||
User-defined keys (UDKs)
|
||
Any of the 15 keys (F6 through F20) on the top row of the keyboard a
|
||
user can define to perform specific functions.
|
||
|
||
Visual character attribute
|
||
A quality of a display character that highlights the character, such as
|
||
bolding and underlining.
|
||
|
||
VMS
|
||
Digital’s proprietary operating system.
|
||
|
||
Window
|
||
An area on your monitor screen that represents all or part of an
|
||
application.
|
||
|
||
Window system
|
||
A windowing architecture that allows the execution and display of
|
||
applications to be independent. Specific components of the architecture
|
||
control the display of applications and determine how applications run.
|
||
Since its introduction by MIT, the X Window System has become an
|
||
industry standard.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Glossary
|
||
Index
|
||
|
||
<x B
|
||
function, 85 < x Backspace button, 85
|
||
Baud rate
|
||
serial communication, 136
|
||
Bell, 159
|
||
A Bell volume, 115
|
||
Accept Connections When Idle Big font setting, 77
|
||
button, 125
|
||
BIND name servers, 144
|
||
Additional characters, 160 to 169
|
||
7-bit character sets, 176
|
||
canceling a sequence, 163
|
||
8-Bit Multinational Characters
|
||
hexadecimal sequences, 164 button, 81
|
||
invalid sequences, 163 7-Bit NRC Characters button, 81
|
||
table, 166 Break function, 201
|
||
Alternate Shift key (German), 154
|
||
Break key
|
||
,< and .> keys, 85
|
||
See F5 key
|
||
Answerback message, 83
|
||
# £ key, 158
|
||
sending, 157
|
||
Appl Cursor Keys button, 81
|
||
Application Keypad button, 82
|
||
Applications C
|
||
moving between, 55 Cables
|
||
running as icons, 57 connections, 17
|
||
Apply push button, 74, 113 ordering, 195
|
||
Arrow keys, 155 Cancel push button, 74, 113
|
||
function, 81 Character format
|
||
Audible indicators, 159 serial communication, 137
|
||
Authorizing hosts Character sets, 7, 177
|
||
LAT or TCP/IP connections, 123 7-bit, 176
|
||
Authorizing users, 122, 128 DEC Technical, 176
|
||
Auto print mode, 88 for printers, 89
|
||
selecting, 156 typing additional characters, 161
|
||
Auto Repeat button, 85, 116 VTE window
|
||
Auto Resize Terminal button, 76 7-bit NRC sets, 86
|
||
Auto Wrap button, 78 choosing a multinational set,
|
||
82
|
||
|
||
|
||
Index 1
|
||
2 Index
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Character sets Cursor (Cont.)
|
||
VTE window (Cont.) style, 79
|
||
selecting 8-bit or 7-bit, 81 text, 79
|
||
Clear Communications menu item, Customer service
|
||
68 See Service
|
||
Clear Display menu item, 68 Customize menu, 113
|
||
Clicking Terminal Manager window, 32,
|
||
defined, 53 34, 112 to 150
|
||
Communication, 197 to 203 Customize Font Path dialog
|
||
See also Serial communication box, 38, 44, 147
|
||
breaking, 201 Customize Host Port dialog
|
||
breaking serial, 156 box, 135, 136
|
||
modems, 200 Customize Keyboard dialog
|
||
network problems, 186 box, 34, 115
|
||
network protocols, 197 Customize Language dialog
|
||
box, 33, 118
|
||
pointing device
|
||
Customize LAT dialog box,
|
||
signals, 203
|
||
36, 138
|
||
serial, 198
|
||
Customize Pointer dialog box,
|
||
cables, 199 119
|
||
connector signals, 201 Customize Print Screen
|
||
XON/XOFF flow control, 199 dialog box, 120
|
||
standards, 203 Customize Security dialog
|
||
Components, 1 box, 122
|
||
Compose Character key, 154, 162 Customize TCP/IP dialog box,
|
||
Compose sequences, 162 42, 142
|
||
Composing characters Customize TCP/IP Name
|
||
See Additional characters Server dialog box, 144
|
||
Computer sessions Customize TCP/IP Routing
|
||
See Sessions Tables dialog box, 145
|
||
Conceal Answerback Message Customize Terminal Manager
|
||
button, 83 dialog box, 132
|
||
Condensed font setting, 77 Customize Window dialog
|
||
box, 129
|
||
Confirm Quit Session button, 133
|
||
display language, 118
|
||
Connectors, 17
|
||
font path, 147
|
||
system, 12
|
||
host or printer port settings,
|
||
Copying text, 69
|
||
134
|
||
disabled by some applications, 72
|
||
keyboard settings, 115
|
||
host synchronization, 70
|
||
LAT settings, 138
|
||
selecting text, 71
|
||
message displays, 132
|
||
Copy menu item, 70
|
||
pointer and mouse settings,
|
||
Create menu, 39, 45, 93 119
|
||
Ctrl key, 153
|
||
recalling settings, 114
|
||
Cursor saving settings, 114
|
||
blinking or steady, 79 security password, 128
|
||
Index 3
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Customize menu DECwindows (Cont.)
|
||
Terminal Manager window (Cont.) overview, 3
|
||
security settings, 122 DECwindows sessions
|
||
TCP/IP Name Server See X window sessions
|
||
settings, 144 Default options
|
||
TCP/IP routing table settings, choosing, 62
|
||
145 < x Delete button, 85
|
||
TCP/IP settings, 142 Diacritical keys, 161
|
||
window settings, 129 Diagnostic messages, 92
|
||
VTE window, 72 Dialog boxes
|
||
VTE windows description, 60
|
||
Customize 7-BIT NRCS Digital manuals
|
||
Selection dialog box, 87 See Related documentation, 195
|
||
Customize Keyboard dialog Display Connection Requests button,
|
||
box, 84 133
|
||
Customize Printer dialog box, Display Cursor button, 79
|
||
88 Display Diagnostics Messages
|
||
Customize VTE Display button, 134
|
||
dialog box, 78 Display language
|
||
Customize VTE General choosing, 32 to 33
|
||
dialog box, 80
|
||
Display Rejected Connection
|
||
Customize VTE Window Requests button, 134
|
||
dialog box, 75
|
||
Double clicking
|
||
general settings, 80 to 83
|
||
defined, 53
|
||
keyboard settings, 84 to 86
|
||
Dragging
|
||
saving and recalling settings,
|
||
defined, 53
|
||
74
|
||
Customize Security Password dialog
|
||
box, 128
|
||
Customize Security Password E
|
||
problems, 184 Echoing data to the screen, 81
|
||
Customizing the VT1000 Editing keypad, 155
|
||
DECwindows Customize utility, Edit menu, 69
|
||
112 Select All, 71
|
||
from the host, 112 Ending a session, 108
|
||
Customizing the VT1000 Terminal Enter key, 155
|
||
Manager window, 112 Error messages, 187
|
||
See Diagnostic messages
|
||
ESC character, 86
|
||
D Ethernet problems, 186
|
||
Data processing keys, 117, 157
|
||
DEC-423 connectors, 201
|
||
DEC Technical character set, 176 to
|
||
177
|
||
DECwindows
|
||
4 Index
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Host systems (Cont.)
|
||
software support, 12
|
||
F
|
||
F1 (Hold) key, 156, 199
|
||
F2 (Print) key, 88, 156 I
|
||
F5 (Break) key, 83, 156, 201 Icon
|
||
Factory-default settings, recalling, expanding to a window, 58
|
||
75, 114 Icon Box, 131
|
||
Font path rearranging icons in, 58
|
||
effect of double-size characters, storing a window in, 57
|
||
180 Icons
|
||
Fonts selecting icon names, 78
|
||
font path settings, 147 to 150 Indicator lights, 158
|
||
font size and window size, 76 Input buffer, 199
|
||
for VTE windows, 77 Input focus
|
||
LAT font paths, 38 giving a window, 55
|
||
TFTP font paths, 44 Installation, 11 to 30
|
||
Function keys, 153, 156 IP addresses, 102, 142
|
||
BOOTP address resolution, 42
|
||
domain name, 145
|
||
G entering, 42
|
||
entering manually, 143
|
||
Group codes
|
||
primary name server, 145
|
||
adding, 140
|
||
secondary name server, 145
|
||
enabling, 140
|
||
IP address formats, 103
|
||
removing, 140
|
||
IP subnet mask
|
||
Group Codes scroll box, 139
|
||
Group Shift key (German), 154, 162
|
||
entering, 42
|
||
IP Subnet Mask, 143
|
||
|
||
|
||
H
|
||
K
|
||
Hexadecimal key sequences, 164
|
||
<> key, 86, 154
|
||
Hold key
|
||
Keyboard, 3, 151 to 159
|
||
See F1 key
|
||
auto repeat feature, 85
|
||
Host-based window manager, 131
|
||
connection, 18
|
||
Host port
|
||
editing keypad, 155
|
||
connections, 104
|
||
figure, 152
|
||
Host system connections
|
||
indicator lights, 158
|
||
VT1000 Terminal Manager
|
||
local echo, 81
|
||
settings, 93 to 103
|
||
main keypad, 152
|
||
Host systems
|
||
function keys, 153
|
||
accessing LAT hosts, 96
|
||
model number location, 34
|
||
accessing TCP/IP hosts, 102
|
||
numeric keypad, 155
|
||
group codes, 139
|
||
Index 5
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Keyboard (Cont.) Local Echo button, 81
|
||
problems, 185 Locator device
|
||
top-row function keys, 156 enabling reports, 171
|
||
warning bell, 84 locator report, 172
|
||
Keyboard dialect, 151 locking and unlocking, 170
|
||
Keyboard language, choosing, 33 to request locator position, 174
|
||
35 select locator events, 175
|
||
Keyboard model Lock Customize Security button, 126
|
||
setting, 116 Locked Screens Visible button, 126
|
||
Keyboard settings Locking customize dialog boxes, 125
|
||
Terminal Manager window, 115 Lock key, 153
|
||
to 117 setting, 116
|
||
Keyboard type, 151 Lock Terminal Manager Customize
|
||
Keyclick, 159 button, 126
|
||
Keyclick volume, 116 Lock UDKs button, 81
|
||
Lock User Features button, 81
|
||
Lock VTE Customize button, 126
|
||
L Logging out, 69
|
||
Language
|
||
display, 118
|
||
keyboard, 116 M
|
||
LA printers Margin bell, 159
|
||
print settings for, 90, 120 Margin Bell button, 84
|
||
LAT communication protocol, 4 Memory
|
||
address, 92 checking available memory, 93
|
||
creating a video terminal window, Memory Remaining scale, 30
|
||
95 Memory controller board
|
||
font paths, 38, 148 installation, 21 to 30
|
||
functions, 197 ordering, 194
|
||
LAT group codes Menus
|
||
entering, 36 pull-down menu, 59
|
||
LAT Terminal Window Service Messages
|
||
Select dialog box, 95
|
||
password security, 128
|
||
controlling displays, 132
|
||
remote X window sessions, 214
|
||
displaying, 133
|
||
security, 122
|
||
Messages region
|
||
settings, 138
|
||
header text, 134
|
||
tuning performance, 140
|
||
scroll lines saved, 134
|
||
X window and DECwindows
|
||
Modems, 200
|
||
sessions, 100
|
||
breaking communication, 157
|
||
LAT Font Path button, 148
|
||
connecting, 200
|
||
Lights
|
||
ordering, 194
|
||
See Indicator lights
|
||
Monitor
|
||
Little font setting, 77
|
||
selection switch, 17
|
||
6 Index
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Monitor (Cont.)
|
||
specifications, 14
|
||
Monitors, 2
|
||
P
|
||
problems, 184
|
||
Mouse, 3 Parity, 137
|
||
button layout, 119 Part numbers
|
||
buttons defined, 52 options, 194
|
||
connection, 18 Password security settings, 128
|
||
figure, 52 Paste menu item, 70
|
||
problems, 185 Pasting text, 69, 71
|
||
settings, 119 host synchronization, 70
|
||
using, 52 QuickCopy, 72
|
||
using the editing keypad as a Pausing a session, 106
|
||
mouse, 155, 156 resuming the session, 108
|
||
PF1 to PF4 keys, 155
|
||
Pointer settings, 119
|
||
Pointing
|
||
N defined, 53
|
||
Network Ports
|
||
hardware support, 12 connecting to, 98
|
||
Network addresses, 92 Power supply, 23
|
||
Network problems, 186 Power switch, 19
|
||
Network protocols Power-up self-test, 187
|
||
See also LAT and TCP/IP Preferred Routes scroll box, 146
|
||
Newline button, 80 Preferred Services scroll box, 98
|
||
Nodes Pressing
|
||
connecting to, 98 defined, 53
|
||
viewing the list of, 98 Printer controller mode, 89
|
||
No Form Feed button, 89, 122 Printer port
|
||
Normal Cursor Keys button, 81 choosing the function of, 137
|
||
Normal font setting, 77 connections, 104
|
||
Numeric keypad, 155 Printers, 110
|
||
Numeric Keypad button, 82 baud rate, 136
|
||
problems, 185
|
||
Printing
|
||
O canceling, 111
|
||
OK push button, 74, 113 from a video terminal window, 90
|
||
Operating systems, 4 from the host system, 88
|
||
Option button from VTE windows, 87
|
||
defined, 61 printed data type, 89
|
||
Options print extent mode, 89
|
||
ordering, 194 print FF mode, 89
|
||
Scroll Area button, 89
|
||
pixel aspect ratio, 121
|
||
printer status, 111
|
||
Index 7
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Printing (Cont.)
|
||
print FF mode, 88, 122
|
||
Print Screen menu, 110 R
|
||
ribbon or toner saver, 122
|
||
Recalling feature settings
|
||
rotated image, 121
|
||
Terminal Manager window, 114
|
||
the screen, 88
|
||
VTE windows, 74
|
||
under host control, 89
|
||
ReGIS graphics, 73
|
||
Print key
|
||
Related documentation, 195
|
||
See F2 key Remote session managers, 100
|
||
Print screen settings, 120 Remote window manager, 131
|
||
Problems Reset Terminal menu item, 68
|
||
See Solving problems Resetting the terminal
|
||
Programming secure reset, 93
|
||
character sets, 178 Resize button
|
||
enable filter rectangle (DECEFR), using, 56
|
||
170
|
||
Resize cursor, 56
|
||
enable locator reports (DECELR),
|
||
Resizing the display font, 76
|
||
171
|
||
Return key, 153
|
||
locator device commands, 169 to
|
||
176 selecting the function of, 80
|
||
locator report (DECLRP), 172 ROM board
|
||
reports, 180 to 182 installation, 21 to 30
|
||
request locator position Rotate/Scale Picture button, 121
|
||
(DECRQLP), 174
|
||
Select locator events (DECSLE),
|
||
175 S
|
||
Pull-down menu Saving feature settings
|
||
displaying, 59 Terminal Manager window, 114
|
||
Push button VTE windows, 74
|
||
defined, 62 Scale
|
||
Push-to-back button, 59 defined, 61
|
||
Screen background pattern, 131
|
||
color, 132
|
||
Q Screen saver feature, 130
|
||
QuickCopy, 72 Scroll Area button, 89
|
||
Quitting Scroll bar
|
||
a remote session manager, 109 using, 63
|
||
LAT X session, 101 Scrolling, 63
|
||
VTE window, 69 preventing, 85
|
||
Scroll region, 63
|
||
Secure reset count, 93
|
||
Security settings, 122
|
||
accepting connections when idle,
|
||
125
|
||
8 Index
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Security settings (Cont.) Sessions (Cont.)
|
||
adding authorized users, 124 video terminal, 35
|
||
authorizing LAT or TCP/IP X window, 35
|
||
connections, 123 Set-up
|
||
displaying a locked dialog box, See Customize menu
|
||
127 Shift clicking
|
||
locking customize dialog boxes, defined, 53
|
||
125 Shift key, 153
|
||
removing authorized users, 125 Shrink-to-icon button, 57
|
||
security password, 128 SIMM card
|
||
Select All menu item, 70 installation, 21 to 30
|
||
Serial communication, 198 ordering, 194
|
||
baud rate, 136 Site preparation, 11 to 13
|
||
settings, 134 Sixel graphics, 73
|
||
Serial connections Sixel printing, 110
|
||
host port, 104 Slider
|
||
printer port, 104 using in scroll bar, 63
|
||
Serial connector, 12 Solving problems, 183
|
||
Serial connectors, 18 Specifications, 190 to 193
|
||
Service, 188 to 189 Start Session dialog box, 41
|
||
Services Status display, 79
|
||
LAT, 97 Stepping arrow, 63
|
||
Preferred Services list, 98 System box, 2
|
||
service list, 98 connectors, 17
|
||
X window, 100 problems, 183
|
||
Session manager, 47 System management tasks, 204
|
||
Session menu, 106, 108 System requirements, 4
|
||
Sessions Systems
|
||
ending, 47, 108
|
||
See Host systems
|
||
LAT font paths
|
||
entering, 38
|
||
LAT group codes
|
||
entering, 36 T
|
||
opening Tab key, 153
|
||
overview, 93 TCP/IP
|
||
pausing, 106 IP address, 92
|
||
quitting from a remote session TCP/IP communication protocol, 4
|
||
manager, 109 creating a video terminal window,
|
||
starting, 35 to 47, 96 102
|
||
on an ULTRIX or UNIX entering an IP address and host
|
||
system, 41 to 47 name, 102
|
||
on a VMS system, 36 to 41 functions, 198
|
||
on the serial host port, 47 name server, 143
|
||
X window on a VMS system, Name Server settings, 144
|
||
36 to 41 password security, 128
|
||
Index 9
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
TCP/IP communication protocol ULTRIX operating system (Cont.)
|
||
(Cont.) UWS version required, 12
|
||
routing tables, 143 version required, 12
|
||
routing tables settings, 145 X window or DECwindows
|
||
security, 122 sessions, 102
|
||
settings, 142 UNIX operating system, 4
|
||
TELNET communication protocol, 4 creating a video terminal window,
|
||
entering a port number, 103 102
|
||
TELNET Terminal Window Host font paths, 44
|
||
Select dialog box, 45, 102 IP addresses, 42
|
||
Temporary Routes scroll box, 146 running the DECwindows session
|
||
Terminal ID button, 82 manager, 46
|
||
Terminal Mode button, 83 sessions on the host or printer
|
||
Terminal size setting, 77 port, 104
|
||
Text entry fields starting a session, 35, 41 to 47
|
||
typing in, 61 video terminal, 47
|
||
TFTP font path, 149 TCP/IP Name Server settings,
|
||
TFTP Font path button, 148 144
|
||
TFTP font paths, 44 TCP/IP routing tables settings,
|
||
ThinWire connector, 12, 18 145
|
||
Tilde key, 86 TCP/IP settings, 142
|
||
Title bar version required, 12
|
||
moving a window with, 55 X window or DECwindows
|
||
Toggle button sessions, 102
|
||
defined, 61 Update Know Services button, 98
|
||
Typewriter keys, 117 UPSS DEC Supplemental button, 82
|
||
UPSS ISO Latin 1 Supplemental
|
||
button, 82
|
||
User-defined keys, 157
|
||
U locking, 81
|
||
ULTRIX operating system, 4 User-preferred supplemental sets,
|
||
creating a video terminal window, 82
|
||
102 Using the VT1000 Terminal
|
||
font paths, 44 Manager window, 91
|
||
IP addresses, 42
|
||
running the DECwindows session
|
||
manager, 46 V
|
||
sessions on the host or printer
|
||
port, 104 Video terminal sessions
|
||
starting a session, 35, 41 to 47 description, 35
|
||
video terminal, 47 on an ULTRIX or UNIX system,
|
||
41 to 47
|
||
TCP/IP Name Server settings,
|
||
144 on a VMS system, 36 to 41
|
||
TCP/IP routing tables settings, Video terminal window, 47
|
||
145 See also VTE windows
|
||
TCP/IP settings, 142 customizing, 112
|
||
10 Index
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
VMS operating system, 4 VTE windows (Cont.)
|
||
creating a video terminal window, Conceal Answerback Message
|
||
95 button, 83
|
||
LAT group codes, 139 creating
|
||
LAT settings, 138 on an ULTRIX or UNIX
|
||
sessions on the host or printer system, 102
|
||
port, 104 on a VMS system, 95
|
||
starting a session, 35 on the host or printer port,
|
||
video terminal, 36 to 41, 47 104
|
||
X window, 36 to 41 cursor key functions, 81
|
||
version required, 12 Customize 7-BIT NRCS Selection
|
||
dialog box, 87
|
||
X window and DECwindows
|
||
sessions, 100 Customize Keyboard dialog box,
|
||
84
|
||
X window sessions
|
||
Customize menu, 73
|
||
remote, 214
|
||
Customize VTE General dialog
|
||
VT1000
|
||
box, 80
|
||
network addresses, 92
|
||
Customize VTE Printer dialog
|
||
VT1000 terminal box, 88
|
||
components, 1 Customize VTE Window dialog
|
||
overview, 1 to 7 box, 75
|
||
parts checklist, 16 customizing, 72 to 90
|
||
VT1000 Terminal Manager window, display cursor, 79
|
||
32, 91 to 150 display settings, 78
|
||
Create menu, 93 font size, 77
|
||
Customize window, 112 format, 66
|
||
features, 91 < x function, 85
|
||
figure, 91 general settings, 80 to 83
|
||
Print Screen menu, 110 icon name, 78
|
||
Session menu, 106 keyboard settings, 84 to 86
|
||
VTE window, 7 keypad function, 82
|
||
quitting, 69 Lock UDKs button, 81
|
||
VTE windows, 66 to 90 Lock User Features button, 81
|
||
,< and .> keys, 85 Margin Bell button, 84
|
||
angle bracket keys, 86 printer settings, 87 to 90
|
||
answerback message, 83 rows and columns, 77
|
||
Auto Repeat button, 85 saving and recalling settings, 74
|
||
auto wrap setting, 78 status display, 79
|
||
blinking or steady cursor, 79 Terminal ID button, 82
|
||
block or underline cursor, 79 Terminal Mode button, 83
|
||
character set selection, 81, 82 text and window background, 79
|
||
choosing a 7-bit NRC character tilde key as ESC key, 86
|
||
set, 86
|
||
VTE Customize menu, 80
|
||
clearing, resetting, or leaving, 68
|
||
Warning Bell button, 84
|
||
Commands menu, 68
|
||
Index 11
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
VT1000–DECwindows
|
||
differences, 51
|
||
W Window title, selecting, 77
|
||
Warning bell, 115, 159
|
||
Warning Bell button, 84
|
||
2-Way Printer Port button, 89 X
|
||
Windows, 51 to 65 XOFF signal, 137
|
||
changing the size of, 56 X window client, 46
|
||
changing the size of icons, 131 X window sessions
|
||
defined, 53 canceling a login box, 101
|
||
expanding from an icon, 58 creating
|
||
foreground color, 132 on an ULTRIX or UNIX
|
||
moving, 55 system, 102
|
||
popping to the top of the stack, on a VMS system, 100
|
||
59 description, 35
|
||
selecting, 55 on an ULTRIX or UNIX system,
|
||
settings 41 to 47
|
||
Terminal Manager window, on a remote VMS system, 214
|
||
129 on a VMS system, 36 to 41
|
||
VTE windows, 75 TCP/IP X window session, 105
|
||
shrinking, 57 X Window System, 3
|
||
stacking, 59
|
||
|